1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Rel 6.0 Installation and System Turn-up Guide.pdf

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH - 4 (PSS-4) Installation and System Turn-up Guide 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Issue 1 | June 2013

| Release 6.0

Legal notice Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein. Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein. Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. Conformance statements

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules Security statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access. Limited warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team. Ordering Information

For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "about this document."

Contents About this document xix Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xix Intended audience

...................................................................................................................................................................... xix xix

How to use this document

....................................................................................................................................................... xix xix

Safety information ....................................................................................................................................................................... xx xx Conventions used

....................................................................................................................................................................... xxi xxi

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxi xxi Document support

................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii xxiii

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii xxiii How to order

............................................................................................................................................................................. xxiii xxiii

How to comment 1

..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii xxiii

Safety Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1-1

2

Equipment Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2-1 Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2 2-2 Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ........................................................................................................... 2-7 2-7 AC Filter Installation and Replacement ......................................................................................................................... 2-18 2-18 Half-slot adapter installation .............................................................................................................................................. 2-23 2-23 Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 .................................................................................... 2-26 2-26 Verify installation and seat packs

..................................................................................................................................... 2-45 2-45

ID module replacement ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-46 2-46 Procedure to connect Rack lamp

...................................................................................................................................... 2-47 2-47

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 iii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Line Driver Port Attributes

................................................................................................................................................. 2-50 2-50

Replacing a card ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53 2-53 1DPP24M Installation procedures

................................................................................................................................... 2-57 2-57

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

.............................................................................. 2-63 2-63

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure ............................................................................................................ 2-68 2-68 11QPE24 Installation procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 2-73 2-73 112PDM11 Installation procedure

................................................................................................................................... 2-76 2-76

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 2-80 2-80 4QPA8 Installation procedure ............................................................................................................................................ 2-83 2-83 PTPCTL Installation procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 2-87 2-87 PTPIO Installation procedures

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-93 2-93

SPD Shelf Installation procedures Shelf cover installation 3

................................................................................................................................... 2-97 2-97

...................................................................................................................................................... 2-105 2-105

Fan and air filter installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3-1 Fan installation and replacement ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3-2 Fan air filter replacement ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3-4

4

Stand-alone node set-up Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4-1 Required materials .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4-2 Preconditioning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6 4-6 Connect to the NE and initialize database

....................................................................................................................... 4-7 4-7

Connect to the NE for CLI access .................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4-12 Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software ......................................................... 4-14 4-14 Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................................ 4-23 4-23 Set the loopback IP address

................................................................................................................................................ 4-24 4-24

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 iv 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure networking information

.................................................................................................................................. 4-26 4-26

Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................................... 4-31 4-31 Set the network element date and time ........................................................................................................................... 4-38 4-38 Disable the ES port monitoring ......................................................................................................................................... 4-44 4-44 Firmware Update .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47 4-47 Update firmware on all circuit packs Circuit Pack Handling

.............................................................................................................................. 4-49 4-49

.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-49 4-49

Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................................... 4-55 4-55 Example configuration of FTP server ............................................................................................................................. 4-57 4-57 5

Circuit connections Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5-1 Provision new wavelength service

..................................................................................................................................... 5-2 5-2

Perform power adjustments ................................................................................................................................................ 5-13 5-13 Delete wavelength service ................................................................................................................................................... 5-29 5-29 Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element ........................................................ 5-34 5-34 5-min timer during service turn-up .................................................................................................................................. 5-41 5-41 Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link 6

............................................................................................................. 5-46 5-46

System Turn-up and commissioning Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6-1 Network commissioning background ................................................................................................................................ 6-2 6-2 Preconditioning procedure ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-5 6-5 Establish connection to the network Provision the system

.................................................................................................................................. 6-7 6-7

............................................................................................................................................................. 6-14 6-14

Commission a FOADM system ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23 6-23 Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

................................................................................................. 6-42 6-42

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services ...................................................................................... 6-53 6-53 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 v 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Contents ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier Disconnect PC from the Network Understanding the loss report

............................................................................................................. 6-58 6-58

.................................................................................................................................... 6-59 6-59

............................................................................................................................................ 6-60 6-60

Generate and review system loss report ......................................................................................................................... 6-67 6-67 Troubleshooting failed adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 6-74 6-74 7

Performance verification testing and data retrieval Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7-1 Perform database backups

A

..................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7-1

Fiber cleaning Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1 A-1 Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................................. A-3 A-3 Inspecting optical connectors .............................................................................................................................................. A-6 A-6 Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................................................... A-7 A-7

B

Tightening torque Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1 B-1 Nominal tightening torques .................................................................................................................................................. B-1 B-1

Glossary Index

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 vi 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of tables 1

Chapter contents

......................................................................................................................................................... xix xix

2-1

Office power connection and cable color

2-2

Test and expected results

2-3

Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 2-31

2-4

Shelf ID and Settings

2-5

Timing cable wire pin number description

2-6

E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram

2-7

E1/DS1 2 MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram ............................................................................................ 2-89

4-1

CIT cable pin assignments

4-2

Shelf ID and settings

6-1

Report contents

6-2

Loss value field loss report explanations ........................................................................................................ 6-63

6-3

Notes field terms and definitions ....................................................................................................................... 6-64

6-4

Highlighting loss report rules

6-5

Minimum EPT parameters for network element

6-6

Loss report fields

6-7

Loss report error messages

A-1

Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors

B-1

Nominal tightening torques ................................................................................................................................... B-1

B-2

Nominal tightening torques when using washers

....................................................................................................... 2-27

...................................................................................................................................... 2-28

............................................................................................................................................. 2-33 .................................................................................................... 2-65

....................................................................................................... 2-88

..................................................................................................................................... 4-2

.............................................................................................................................................. 4-21 4-21

........................................................................................................................................................ 6-62 6-62

............................................................................................................................. 6-65 ......................................................................................... 6-67

..................................................................................................................................................... 6-72 6-72 .................................................................................................................................. 6-74 ..................................................................................................... A-3

......................................................................................... B-2

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 vii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of tables ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 viii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures 2-1

PSS-4 slot number label (3KC13252AA) position

....................................................................................... 2-3

2-2

Showing compliance and safety warnings

2-3

eSFP plugged in 112PDM11 with extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)

2-4

Attenuator used on 112PDM11 with extended cover

2-5

E4PFACK card ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20 2-20

2-6

Half slot adapter install tool - view1

................................................................................................................ 2-24

2-7

Half slot adapter install tool - view2

................................................................................................................ 2-25

2-8

Rear ground attachment point

2-9

Power Cable

2-10

Power cables installed (front cover open)

2-11

Power cables management to the left of the shelf

2-12

Power cables management beneath the shelf

2-13

Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33 2-33

2-14

Fibers Placement

2-15

Short LC fiber boot ................................................................................................................................................. 2-35 2-35

2-16

Rear ground attachment point

2-17

CA-AC Power supply cable

2-18

Connecting CA-AC cable to AC cable adaptor ............................................................................................ 2-39

2-19

E4PFACK power input port

2-20

E4PFACK power input port - another view

2-21

CA-AC cable routing

............................................................................................................................................. 2-42 2-42

2-22

AC filter switch OFF

............................................................................................................................................. 2-43 2-43

2-23

AC filter switch ON

....................................................................................................... 2-5 ............................................. 2-16

................................................................................ 2-17

............................................................................................................................ 2-26

.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-28 2-28 ...................................................................................................... 2-29 ....................................................................................... 2-30

................................................................................................ 2-31

..................................................................................................................................................... 2-34 2-34

............................................................................................................................ 2-37

................................................................................................................................ 2-38

................................................................................................................................ 2-40 .................................................................................................. 2-41

............................................................................................................................................... 2-44 2-44

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ix 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-24

Cable - Rack lamp connection ............................................................................................................................ 2-47

2-25

TRU - connectors location

2-26

TRU front view

2-27

Bi-directional amplifier ......................................................................................................................................... 2-50 2-50

2-28

Uni-directional amplifier

2-29

Set opposite direction port

................................................................................................................................... 2-51

2-30

Create external connection

.................................................................................................................................. 2-52

2-31

E1 cable

2-32

E1 pin assignment table

2-33

E1 wire diagram

2-34

11DPE12 card face plate

2-35

11DPE12A card views ........................................................................................................................................... 2-64

2-36

11DPE12E card face plate

................................................................................................................................... 2-64

2-37

Timing cable wire diagram

.................................................................................................................................. 2-65

2-38

PSS4 shelf view

2-39

11QPA4 card views

2-40

Lock the card

2-41

Angled boot fiber connector

2-42

Connect fibers to ports

2-43

Ports linked by jumpers

2-44

11QPE24 card views

2-45

PSS4 shelf view

....................................................................................................................................................... 2-74 2-74

2-46

112PDM11 Card

...................................................................................................................................................... 2-76 2-76

2-47

Card locked in place ............................................................................................................................................... 2-77 2-77

2-48

Angled boot fiber connector

2-49

Fibers connected to ports ...................................................................................................................................... 2-78

2-50

Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-79 2-79

................................................................................................................................... 2-48

........................................................................................................................................................ 2-49 2-49

...................................................................................................................................... 2-50 2-50

...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-58 2-58 ........................................................................................................................................ 2-58

...................................................................................................................................................... 2-59 2-59 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-63

....................................................................................................................................................... 2-66 2-66 ................................................................................................................................................ 2-68

............................................................................................................................................................ 2-69 2-69 ............................................................................................................................... 2-70

.......................................................................................................................................... 2-70 ........................................................................................................................................ 2-71

.............................................................................................................................................. 2-73

............................................................................................................................... 2-78

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 x 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-51

4DPA2 card face plate

........................................................................................................................................... 2-80

2-52

Lock the card - 4DPA2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-81

2-53

4QPA8 card

2-54

Card locked in place ............................................................................................................................................... 2-84 2-84

2-55

Angled boot fiber connector

2-56

Fibers connected to ports ...................................................................................................................................... 2-85

2-57

Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-86 2-86

2-58

PTPCTL card overview

2-59

E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable ................................................................................................................................... 2-88

2-60

E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable

2-61

Card locked in place ............................................................................................................................................... 2-90 2-90

2-62

Angled boot fiber connector

2-63

Fibers connected to ports ...................................................................................................................................... 2-91

2-64

Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-92 2-92

2-65

LC adaptors

2-66

LC interface assignments

2-67

Card locked in place ............................................................................................................................................... 2-95 2-95

2-68

Angled boot fiber connector

2-69

Fibers connected to ports ...................................................................................................................................... 2-96

2-70

Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-96 2-96

2-71

SPD installation for a 19 inch ANSI rack

...................................................................................................... 2-97

2-72

SPD installation for a 23 inch ANSI rack

...................................................................................................... 2-98

2-73

Bay frame ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-99 2-99

2-74

Power supply cable

2-75

Plugging the connector

2-76

Cable tie

2-77

SPD unit connects to the AC filter

............................................................................................................................................................... 2-83 2-83

............................................................................................................................... 2-85

........................................................................................................................................ 2-87

........................................................................................................................ 2-89

............................................................................................................................... 2-91

............................................................................................................................................................... 2-93 2-93 ..................................................................................................................................... 2-94 2-94

............................................................................................................................... 2-95

.............................................................................................................................................. 2-100 ....................................................................................................................................... 2-101

................................................................................................................................................................... 2-102 2-102 ................................................................................................................. 2-102

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xi 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-78

AC filter switch - OFF status

........................................................................................................................... 2-103

2-79

AC filter switch - ON status

............................................................................................................................. 2-104

3-1

1830 PSS-4 fan module ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-2

Air filter removal

4-1

CIT cable

4-2

New CIT cable

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4-3

4-3

New CIT cable

............................................................................................................................................................ 4-4 4-4

4-4

PC command window

4-5

Login Screen

4-6

WebUI invalid database warning

4-7

WebUI NE name prompt

4-8

WebUI NE restart progress window ................................................................................................................. 4-10

4-9

Windows Firewall settings ................................................................................................................................... 4-16

4-10

Default route box ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-27 4-27

4-11

Default route

4-12

OSPF settings

4-13

Create OSPF Area

4-14

New OSPF area created

4-15

WebUI OAMP port provisioning

4-16

WebUI IP routes menu

4-17

WebUI IP routes window

4-18

WebUI Create IP route window

4-19

WebUI IP routes window with new route

4-20

NTP Servers screen

4-21

Create NTP Server screen

4-22

Network Time Protocol Properties screen

4-23

Firmware

....................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3-5

...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4-3

.............................................................................................................................................. 4-7

............................................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4-8 ......................................................................................................................... 4-9

...................................................................................................................................... 4-10

............................................................................................................................................................. 4-27 4-27 ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-28 4-28 ................................................................................................................................................... 4-29 4-29 ........................................................................................................................................ 4-29 ...................................................................................................................... 4-32

.......................................................................................................................................... 4-33 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-34 ......................................................................................................................... 4-35 ...................................................................................................... 4-36

................................................................................................................................................ 4-40 4-40 .................................................................................................................................... 4-41 ..................................................................................................... 4-42

.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47 4-47

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24

Circuit pack handling - Example 1

................................................................................................................... 4-50

4-25

Circuit pack handling - Example 2

................................................................................................................... 4-50

4-26

Circuit pack handling - Example 3

................................................................................................................... 4-51

4-27

Circuit pack handling - Example 4

................................................................................................................... 4-51

4-28

Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5

.................................................................................... 4-52

4-29

Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6

.................................................................................... 4-53

4-30

Proper LC Connector Handling

4-31

Broken OSC Fibers

4-32

FileZilla connect to server window

4-33

FileZilla server window

4-34

FileZilla groups menu

4-35

FileZilla groups window ....................................................................................................................................... 4-60

4-36

FileZilla add group window

4-37

FileZilla groups shared folders window

4-38

FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 4-63

4-39

FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 4-64 4-64

4-40

FileZilla users window

4-41

FileZilla add user window

4-42

FileZilla users shared folders window ............................................................................................................. 4-67

4-43

FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 4-68

5-1

1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

5-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window

5-3

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button .......................................................... 5-4

5-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window ................................................................................ 5-5

5-5

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu

5-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port .......................................................................................... 5-6

5-7

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu

......................................................................................................................... 4-54

................................................................................................................................................ 4-54 4-54 .................................................................................................................. 4-58

........................................................................................................................................ 4-59 4-59

........................................................................................................................................... 4-60 4-60

................................................................................................................................ 4-61 ......................................................................................................... 4-62

.......................................................................................................................................... 4-65 4-65 ................................................................................................................................... 4-66

........................................................................................................... 5-2 ....................................................................... 5-3

................................................................................ 5-6

.................................................................... 5-7

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xiii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu

..................................................... 5-8

5-9

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1 ..................................................... 5-9

5-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2

.................................................. 5-10

5-11

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 3

.................................................. 5-11

5-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 4

.................................................. 5-12

5-13

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5

.................................................. 5-12

5-14

1354 RM-PhM power management service

5-15

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment .................................................................................... 5-15

5-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment .................................................................................... 5-16

5-17

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .................................................................................. 5-17

5-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection

5-19

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

5-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain

5-21

1354 RM-PhM power level reading ................................................................................................................. 5-22

5-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .................................................................................. 5-24

5-23

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection

5-24

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

5-25

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain

5-26

1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

5-27

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning

5-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM delete button

5-29

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning

5-30

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

5-31

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window

5-32

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button

5-33

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning

5-34

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window

.................................................................................................. 5-14

........................................................... 5-18

.................................................................................... 5-19

............................................................................................ 5-20

........................................................... 5-25

.................................................................................... 5-26

............................................................................................ 5-27

................................................................................................................... 5-28 ........................................................ 5-29

............................................................................................... 5-30 ........................................................ 5-30

......................................................................... 5-31 .................................................................. 5-32 ................................................. 5-33 .............................................. 5-33

............................................................................. 5-35

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xiv 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-35

1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu ............................................................................................................. 5-36

5-36

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port

5-37

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel ................................................................................... 5-37

5-38

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power

5-39

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

5-40

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection

5-41

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning

.......................................................... 5-40

5-42

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window

.......................................................... 5-41

5-43

An example of network service

5-44

An example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and auto-keyed service

5-45

1830 PSS-4 Regen bus link

6-1

Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems

6-2

1354 RM-PhM login screen

6-3

1354 RM-PhM new server/port window

.......................................................................................................... 6-9

6-4

1354 RM-PhM new server/port window

........................................................................................................ 6-10

6-5

1354 RM-PhM topology view screen .............................................................................................................. 6-10

6-6

1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings

........................................................................................................... 6-11

6-7

1354 RM-PhM create network element

.......................................................................................................... 6-12

6-8

1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NE’s

.......................................................................................................... 6-13

6-9

CPB login window .................................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6-15

6-10

CPB main window .................................................................................................................................................. 6-16 6-16

6-11

CPB provision system wizard overview ......................................................................................................... 6-17

6-12

1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options

6-13

1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file

6-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list

6-15

1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages

6-16

Commissioning service for a FOADM system

....................................................................................... 5-36

........................................... 5-38

......................................................................... 5-39 ............................................. 5-40

........................................................................................................................ 5-42 ................... 5-43

................................................................................................................................. 5-46 ........................................................................ 6-3

.................................................................................................................................. 6-9

........................................................................................ 6-18 .......................................... 6-19

..................................................................... 6-20

.......................................................................................... 6-21

............................................................................................ 6-24

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xv 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-17

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion

................................. 6-25

6-18

1354 RM-PhM wavelength services

6-19

1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button ..................................................................................................................... 6-26

6-20

1354 RM-PhM power adjust ............................................................................................................................... 6-27

6-21

1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message

6-22

1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-29

6-23

1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-30

6-24

1354 RM-PhM power level reading ................................................................................................................. 6-32

6-25

1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu

6-26

1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window .................................................................................................. 6-34

6-27

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .................................................................................. 6-36

6-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .................................................................................. 6-38

6-29

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu

6-30

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window ................................................................... 6-40

6-31

Commissioning service for a FOADM system

6-32

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power

6-33

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power .................................................................................. 6-46

6-34

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

6-35

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment

6-36

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

6-37

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power

6-38

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power .................................................................................. 6-55

6-39

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

.......................................................................... 6-56

6-40

Shows a section of the loss report for a span and a node

......................................................................... 6-61

6-41

CPB Create system loss report overview

6-42

CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file

........................................................................... 6-68

6-43

CPB Create system loss report stages progress window

.......................................................................... 6-69

................................................................................................................ 6-26

........................................................................................ 6-28

.................................................................................................................. 6-33

................................................................................... 6-39

............................................................................................ 6-43 .......................................................... 6-45

.......................................................................... 6-47

............................................................................ 6-48 .......................................................................... 6-50 .......................................................... 6-54

....................................................................................................... 6-68

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xvi 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-44

CPB Create system loss report last page

........................................................................................................ 6-70

6-45

CPB sample loss report

7-1

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu

7-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window

7-3

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu

7-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup

7-5

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu

7-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon ............................................................................................ 7-5

......................................................................................................................................... 6-71 ................................................................................................ 7-2 ................................................................................... 7-3

......................................................................................... 7-4

..................................................................................................... 7-4 ........................................................................... 7-5

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xvii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

List of figures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xviii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document About this document

Purpose

This manual provides instructions for installation, turn-up and testing of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4). Intended audience

This installation manual portion of this document is for personnel who will install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 equipment. The System Turn-up and Test (also called Integration) is for personnel who will integrate the NEs into a complete network. This manual is intended ONLY for use in a central office environment in Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) installations and for installation and testing performed prior to turnover to central office personnel. How to use this document

This manual is divided into six parts each containing several chapters. The first part explains the installation sequence at a high level. It is useful to the trained installer or job planner. The other parts provide instructional steps for personnel needing additional detail or background information. The chapters in each part are numbered in the order which they are to be performed. Chapter contents Table 1

Chapter contents

Chapter

Contents

Chapter 1, “Safety”

This chapter describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.

Chapter 2, “Equipment Installation”

This chapter describes how to install and equip a network element (NE) to get it ready to operate in the network.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xix 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 1

Chapter contents

(continued)

Chapter

Contents

Chapter 3, “Fan and air filter installation”

This chapter provides instructions for installation and replacement of the fan and air filter.

Chapter 4, “Stand-alone node set-up”

This chapter describes how to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-4 (PSS-4) network element (NE).

Chapter 5, “Circuit connections”

The procedures in this chapter should be used when adding new wavelength services to an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network.

Chapter 6, “System Turn-up and commissioning”

This chapter provides the detailed procedures required to commission the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager (1354 RM-PhM) along with the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool.

Chapter 7, “Performance verification testing and data retrieval”

The procedures in this chapter helps you perform final verification on the network after commissioning is complete.

Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for the cleaning and inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment.

Appendix B, “Tightening torque”

The listed tightening torque values are to be used for all fasteners on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).

Glossary

Defines terms used throughout the documentation.

Index

Provides detailed access to the contents of this document.

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xx 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Conventions used Appearance

Description

Italicized text

•

File and directory names

•

Emphasized information

•

Titles of publications

•

A value that the user supplies

•

Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface or in a hardware label

•

The name of a key on the keyboard

Graphical user interface text or key name

input text

Command names and text that the user types or selects as input to a system

output text

Text that a system displays or prints

Related information

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-4 (PSS-4) Installation and System turn-up Guide is part of a set of documents that support Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS products. The following items are available: Document Number

Document Title

3KC-13324-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

3KC-13325-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide

3KC-13327-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Release 6.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide

3KC-13328-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Product Family Release 6.0 Documentation Library

PSS documents 8DG-61259-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xxi 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Document Number

Document Title

8DG-61259-AAAA-TMZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-THZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TGZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Photonics TL1 Commands and Messages Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TFZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Switching TL1 Commands and Messages Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TJZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TKZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36 (PSS-36) Release 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Photonics and Switching)

8DG-61259-AAAA-TLZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 64 (PSS-64) Release 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Switching)

8DG-61259-AAAA-TAZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Safety Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TEZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide

8DG-61688-TAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide

3KC27912AAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.9.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide

8DG60418LAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide

3KC27912BAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.9.0 MD4H Edge Device User Guide

8DG60386JAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xxii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Document Number

Document Title

8DG60013MAAA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA Release 3.5.0 User Guide

3KC-42940-AAAA-TQZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Versatile WDM Module (VWM) Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

8DG-61259-AAAA-TZZZA

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Family Release 6.0 Documentation Library

Note: This Documentation library does not include the EPT User Guide. This is published on separate media. Document support

Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a nontechnical number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630) 713 5000 (for all countries). Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact information. Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and select your country from the menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone and E-mail Contact Information". How to order

Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatellucent.com and select your product from the menu under "Technical Content for". How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline ([email protected]).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xxiii 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

About this document ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 xxiv 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

1

Safety 1

Structure of safety statements Overview

This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document. General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

B

C

D

E L P M

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

SA

E

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury due to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transport and position this equipment. [ABC123]

F G H

Item

Structure element

Purpose

1

Safety alert symbol

Indicates the potential for personal injury (optional)

2

Safety symbol

Indicates hazard type (optional)

3

Signal word

Indicates the severity of the hazard

4

Hazard type

Describes the source of the risk of damage or injury

5

Safety message

Consequences if protective measures fail

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Safety

Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Item

Structure element

Purpose

6

Avoidance message

Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7

Identifier

The reference ID of the safety statement (optional)

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows: Signal word

Meaning

DANGER

Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 1-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

2

Equipment Installation 2

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes how to install and equip a network element (NE) to get it ready to operate in the network. Contents Before you begin

2-2

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

2-7

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

2-18

Half-slot adapter installation

2-23

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

2-26

Verify installation and seat packs

2-45

ID module replacement

2-46

Procedure to connect Rack lamp

2-47

Line Driver Port Attributes

2-50

Replacing a card

2-53

1DPP24M Installation procedures

2-57

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

2-63

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

2-68

11QPE24 Installation procedure

2-73

112PDM11 Installation procedure

2-76

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure

2-80

4QPA8 Installation procedure

2-83

PTPCTL Installation procedures

2-87

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PTPIO Installation procedures

2-93

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

2-97

Shelf cover installation

2-105

Before you begin Before you begin

Prior to performing any procedures in this chapter, review “Structure of safety statements” (p. 1-1). Note: Any command Line Interface (CLI) commands associated with implementing procedures are listed in this chapter. CLI commands are in bold type text and are entered by the user performing the procedures; example: B Go back one character on the CLI screen display.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Before you begin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-1 PSS-4 slot number label (3KC13252AA) position

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Before you begin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Before you begin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety labeling Figure 2-2 Showing compliance and safety warnings

Figure 2-2, “Showing compliance and safety warnings” (p. 2-5) shows the Alcatel-Lucent labeling on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 that provides compliance and safety warnings. System installation overview

To install an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, perform the following steps: • •

“Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4” (p. 2-7) “Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4” (p. 2-26)

•

“Verify installation and seat packs” (p. 2-45)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Before you begin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use information from other maintenance procedures in this chapter as needed to complete physical installation. See Software setup and configuration in User Provisioning Guide for the procedures needed to configure and place the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in service.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Before you begin

Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. For details and ordering information, see 1830 PSS-4 installation kits in Product Information and Planning Guide. Procedure for ETSI equipment rack

Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an ETSI equipment rack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the ESD and ground label on the ETSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13334AAAA) as shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port (P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Determine the mounting location.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Attach the ETSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13334AAAA) to right side of the 1830 PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Attach the ETSI cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13057AAAB) to the left side of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf, with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012), as shown in the following figure:

Refer to the “eSFP cable management” (p. 2-14) for more information on eSFP cable management in ETSI racks. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in an ETSI rack, using two-M6x12 screws (P/N 1AD009150001) per side. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-9 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure for ANSI equipment rack

Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an ANSI equipment rack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the ESD and GROUND label on the ANSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13338AAAA) as shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port (P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Determine the mounting location.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-10 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Attach ANSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13338AAAA) to the right side of the 1830 PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Attach the 23” cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13056AAAB) to the left side of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf, with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012), as shown in the following figure:

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-11 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in an ANSI 23” rack, using two 12-24 screws (P/N 1AD139920001) per side. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure for EIA equipment rack

Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an EIA (19") equipment rack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the ESD and GROUND label on the EIA mounting ear (P/N 3KC13336AAAA) as shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port (P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Determine the mounting location.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-12 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Attach 19” EIA rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13336AAAA) to the right side of the 1830 PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side as shown in the following figure:

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-13 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Attach the 19” cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13055AAAB) to the left side of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf , with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) as shown in the following figure:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in the EIA rack, using two 12-24 screws (P/N 1AD139920001) per side. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

eSFP cable management

The PSS-4 shelf has an open space of 44 mm between the Card and the standard front cover (3KC12890AA**) as shown in the following figure:

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-14 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The RJ-45 boot has a length of 25mm with a space of 44mm between the card and the standard front cover. This leaves a space of 10 mm which is the space available for bending the STP cable. This is less than its threshold -4xOD (normal). Note: There are several thresholds for STP cable, local field support engineer should check before deployment. If the Bending radius is less than the threshold, it may have a negative impact on its functioning. The possible solutions to resolve this problem are listed in the following: 1. Use the shortest RJ-45 boot from Tyco (11mm) with standard front cover (3KC12890AA**); the cable management space increases by 7mm, although the bending radius is still less than its threshold. 2. Remove the ETSI rack door and the front cover. 3. Use extended cover (3KC13331AAAA) installed on ANSI, EIA or ETSI (without rack door) rack.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-15 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-3 eSFP plugged in 112PDM11 with extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)

SDI SFP cable management

The SDI SFP is supported by PSS-4, under this case, extended cover (3KC13331AAAA) may be used. Local support engineer should pay attention to the space between the card and the front cover basing the bending radius of the cable. An example picture is shown below:

Attenuator usage

Using Normal front cover (3KC12890AA**) or installed on ETSI rack with rack door, attenuator can not be used. Using Extended front cover (3KC13331AAAA) or installed on ETSI rack without rack door, attenuator can be used with angle or short boot fiber.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-16 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-4 Attenuator used on 112PDM11 with extended cover

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-17 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AC Filter Installation and Replacement AC filter installation procedure

Complete the following steps to install and AC filter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the AC filter 3KC12834AAAA in ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with Step 2. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Grasp AC filter with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-18 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, keep the eject handle open and grasp the card by the retaining screws in both sides as shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle force to fully seat the card on the backplane.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-19 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Lock the card into place by closing the eject handle. As the eject handle close, it turning as card contacts the backplane. Push the eject handle towards faceplate, further seating the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Completely tighten the retaining screws, but do not over tighten it. Figure 2-5 E4PFACK card

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-20 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AC Filter replacement procedure

Complete the following steps to replace the AC filter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Turn the switch of the AC filter 'OFF' with 0# screw driver. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Disconnect the cable CA-AC power supply from the outlet of AC power supply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Press the tab on the connector of AC CABLE ADAPTOR and pull it out from power input port of AC filter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Loosen the retaining screws on both the sides.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-21 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

AC Filter Installation and Replacement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Pull the eject handle of AC filter, and AC card is pushed out by eject handle. As the card is partially pulled out, grasp the card by the retaining screws in both sides and pull the card fully out. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-22 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Half-slot adapter installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Half-slot adapter installation Before you begin

The customer order and rack face drawings show where the circuit packs need to be installed. Some circuit packs are half height and half slot adapters. Half-slot adapters shown in the following figure are necessary to install these circuit packs. Install all the adapters first, before installing any other flexible circuit packs. For Equipment installing on 19” European Rack, the white hook on 19” ETSI cable management (3KC13070AAAB) must be removed before installing the second half slot adaptor in PSS-4 chassis. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify that the sub-rack power is turned off at the power filters in slot 2 and slot 3. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Disconnect the power cables which connect to power filters in slot 2 and slot 3 from main power supply or the power supply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Refer to the Rack face drawing for the site to determine where half-slot adapters are required to be placed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the half-slot adapter in the middle of the chassis as shown in the following figure. View from the side to ensure that it does not touch any of the electrical components on the backplane or any other circuit packs.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-23 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Half-slot adapter installation

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that the half-slot adapter is well seated on dock, and secure it with a 13” (or longer) #2 Phillips screw driver (with 13” or 330 mm shank or longer) as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-6 Half slot adapter install tool - view1

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-24 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Half-slot adapter installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-7 Half slot adapter install tool - view2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Repeat steps 4 through 5 till all the required adapters are installed. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-25 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 Powering and provisioning procedure for DC

Complete the following steps to apply power and provision Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for IBN applications. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-4. A ground cable is not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The ground wire should be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2 cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 inch spacing. Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm can damage the equipment. Figure 2-8 Rear ground attachment point

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-26 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Measure resistance between the case of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and the CBN or IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that power supply for device is shut off at BDFB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Connect A and B power cables to customer provided power supply cables using table Table 2-1, “Office power connection and cable color” (p. 2-27). Note: In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, the battery return conductor is an Isolated DC return (DC-I). Table 2-1

Office power connection and cable color

Office power connection

Cable color

A Battery -

Blue

A Return +

Red

A Ground

Black (NAR) Yellow/Green (ETSI)

B Battery -

Blue

B Return +

Red

B Ground

Black (NAR) Yellow/Green (ETSI)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-27 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Test continuity of A and B power cables using Table 2-2, “Test and expected results” (p. 2-28) for each cable. Figure 2-9 Power Cable

Table 2-2

Test and expected results

Test point 1

Test point 2

Expected measurement

Pin 1

Pin 3

Open circuit

Pin 3

Pin 2

Minimal closed circuit, dependent on wire length (~1 ohm)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-28 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Connect power cables to power filters. Route cables to the left to provide access to filter ports and for air filter replacement. Figure 2-10 Power cables installed (front cover open)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-29 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-11 Power cables management to the left of the shelf

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-30 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-12 Power cables management beneath the shelf

Note: The power cables management depends on the rack space. The pictorial illustrations in Figure 2-11, “Power cables management to the left of the shelf” (p. 2-30) and Figure 2-12, “Power cables management beneath the shelf” (p. 2-31) shows the two different methods of managing the power cables. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Turn on A and B power at BDFB and verify power connection using Table 2-3, “Power connection test and Results” (p. 2-31). Table 2-3

Power connection test and Results

Test

Expected Results

Shut off power A at BDFB, with corresponding power B turned on

Power Filter A status LED extinguishes Power Filter B status LED remains lit

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-31 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 2-3

Power connection test and Results

(continued)

Test

Expected Results

Shut off power B at BDFB, with corresponding power A turned on

Power Filter B status LED extinguishes Power Filter A status LED remains lit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Turn off A and B power at BDFB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Insert a half-slot pack adapter in the filter slot next to the Equipment Controller. There are two sizes of filter packs, full size and half size. Half-size packs require that a half-size pack adapter be installed prior to inserting the filter pack(s). To install the half-size pack adapter, refer to “Half-slot adapter installation” (p. 2-23) for the detailed procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Insert OTs as specified by the client. First insert an OT in the lower OT slot, then insert an OT in the upper OT slot. When inserting a OT in the upper OT slot, EC/SFC/SFD should be lifted to avoid conflict. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Install EC and any required SFD/SFC filters. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Insert blanks in any unused slots. If no circuit pack is installed, insert the full-size blank. For SFC/D full/half slot blank, they should be fastened.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-32 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Set the Shelf ID using Shelf ID selector switch on lower left of shelf. Choose from the options in Table 2-4, “Shelf ID and Settings” (p. 2-33). Figure 2-13 Shelf ID

Table 2-4

Shelf ID and Settings

Shelf

Shelf ID setting

Master

1

Peer shelf 1

2

Peer shelf 2

3

Peer shelf 3

4

Peer shelf 4

5

Peer shelf 5

6

Peer shelf 6

7

Peer shelf 7

8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Verify that the PSS-4 FAN and air filter is installed (see “Fan air filter replacement” (p. 3-4)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-33 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Connect shelf to shelf with cross-over Ethernet cables, routing cables to the left of the shelf. Daisy chain (inter-shelf DCN) protection is NOT supported for 1830 PSS-4 multi-shelf configurations. The Close Loop connection of the daisy chain is strictly forbidden to avoid dangerous DCN network storming. (See Multi-shelf NE configuration in Product Information and Planning Guide.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Insert XFPs and SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Inspect and clean the XFP/SFP modules after insertion. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports, per shelf-specific customer documentation. For ILAs, turn angled boot fibers downward, then back to the left of the shelf with enough bent radius. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fiber together in an appropriate way as shown in the following figure. Note: Only fibers with 40 degree angled boot are allowed. Straight boot fibers may conflict with the front cover of the shelf. Short boot application should be checked with local field support engineers before deployment. Figure 2-14 Fibers Placement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-34 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Fiber slack is neatly coiled, using the hook-and-loop fasteners included in the installation kit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Turn on A and B power at BDFB. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Fiber connectors

In general, the type of fiber jumper used with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 depends on the type of rack (bay or cabinet) the equipment is installed. Commonly, Fiber jumpers used with ETSI racks need to have a short, straight fiber boot as shown in Figure 2-15, “Short LC fiber boot” (p. 2-35)to eliminate any interference between the fiber jumper sand the ETSI cabinet door. Fiber jumpers used with ANSI or EIA racks need to have angled fiber boots as shown in “Fiber connectors” (p. 2-36). It is important that the right fiber jumpers be ordered based on the type of rack being used. Figure 2-15 Short LC fiber boot

Straight short boot. 35 mm maximum from tip of fiber to back edge of boot.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-35 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 degree angled. Must rotate 360 degrees without damaging fiber. 53.1 mm max. from fiber tip to back edge of boot. Powering and provisioning procedure for AC

Complete the following steps to apply power from AC supply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for IBN applications. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-4. A ground cable is not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The ground wire should be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2 cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 inch spacing.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-36 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm can damage the equipment. Figure 2-16 Rear ground attachment point

Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Measure resistance between the case of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and the CBN or IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that the AC filter is properly installed in Slot2/Slot3.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-37 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Unpack the cable CA-AC Power Supply (3KC05127AXAA, X is variant for cable type, it depends on type of installation kits) and AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AAAA from installation kit. Figure 2-17 CA-AC Power supply cable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Ensure no sides of these two items are connecting either power supply or AC filter cards.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-38 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Connect the outlet of the cable CA-AC Power supply and AC CABLE ADAPTOR, and ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-18 Connecting CA-AC cable to AC cable adaptor

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-39 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Plug the connector of AC CABLE ADAPTOR into power input port of AC filter and ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-19 E4PFACK power input port

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-40 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-20 E4PFACK power input port - another view

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-41 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Route the cable and secure towards AC power supply. Place the plug of the cable ‘CA-AC Power Supply’ near the outlet of AC power supply. Do not plug it into AC power outlet before following steps. Figure 2-21 CA-AC cable routing

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Ensure that the cable routing near AC filter is not too tight.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-42 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure that the switch of AC filter is in ‘OFF’ status. If not, use No.0 screw driver to turn it off as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-22 AC filter switch OFF

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Verify that the designated AC power source outlet is surge protected. Refer to Power filters in Product Information and Planning Guide for the AC power source specification. Reference the site engineering specification for any additional site specific AC requirements. Connect the other end of the cable ‘CA-AC Power Supply’ to the outlet of AC power supply.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-43 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Turn the switch of AC filter ‘ON’ with No.0 screw driver as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-23 AC filter switch ON

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-44 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Verify installation and seat packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify installation and seat packs Objective

Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in the previous procedures and is ready for initial setup. Note: If EC/SFC/SFD is seated in their respective slots, then to facilitate the installation of OT/LD cards beneath the EC, ensure the screws on the faceplate of the EC/SFC/SFD are fastened securely. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted correctly. Verify that the fibers are properly run between packs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure that they are run properly. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If there are multiple shelves, verify that shelf ID settings and LAN cables are correctly linked between the shelves. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Verify that the shelf is powered up and the green led is lit on both power filter modules. Verify that the fans are running. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-45 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

ID module replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ID module replacement Overview

Unlike the user panel for the 1830 PSS-32, the 1830 PSS-4 ID module can only be replaced when the unit is powered down. The 1830 PSS-4 ID module has an EPROM that contains the serial number and information to retain remote access capability in the event of a database loss, similar to a user panel in the 1830 PSS-32. ID module replacement procedure

Note: When restarting after replacement of an ID module on an NE that has been powered down, the new ID module will cause the NE to appear as though it has never been commissioned. To preserve traffic during the restart, the NE database should NOT be initialized. Instead, a previously backed up database is restored to the NE after the restart. Use the following procedure to replace an ID module on an 1830 PSS-4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Reprovision the NE Name for the NE. This can be done during the initial connection to the NE with the WebUI, or using the CLI command: config general name. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Reprovision the loopback IP address for the NE, using the CLI command: config interface loopback ip. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

On an 1830 PSS, reprovision the user panel OAMP port IP address for this NE, using the CLI command: config interface 1/1/oamp ip. Physically replace the 1830PSS-1 FAN (integrated Fan/User Panel). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Reprovision the static routing (gateway) information for this NE, using the CLI command: config cn routes static add. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

To bring the database from a remote server to the NE, enter the CLI command: config database restore force. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-46 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Procedure to connect Rack lamp

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure to connect Rack lamp Overview

In 1830 PSS-4, the Rack lamp control is implemented by using the housekeeping ports integrated in -48 Vdc Power Filter cards. Procedure

The following procedure describes the steps to connect a Rack lamp to the Housekeeping ports. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify that the -48 Vdc power filters are properly installed in slot 2 and slot 3 respectively. Note: The Housekeeping ports are available only on -48 Vdc power filters. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The connection between Rack lamp unit of TRU and housekeeping of PSS4 is through a 2500 length cable (PN: 3KC13193AAAA). One end of this cable is terminated with two RJ-45 connectors and another end is terminated with one male DB9 connector. Figure 2-24 Cable - Rack lamp connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Install the two RJ-45 connectors of the rack lamp cable into two housekeeping connectors of two -48 Vdc Power filter cards respectively. The RJ45A connector is inserted in housekeeping connector of slot 2 power filter card and RJ45B connector is inserted in housekeeping connector of slot 3. Note: The RJ45A and RJ45B connector location sequence cannot exchange and if multi-shelves are cascaded, this rack lamp cable is only permitted to connect to housekeeping ports on the main shelf.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-47 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Procedure to connect Rack lamp

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Route the rack lamp cable from the left of the rack to the TRU installed on the rack top or as determined by location of the connection point in the field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Connect the male DB9 connector of the rack lamp cable to the female DB9 connector of rack lamp unit on TRU (P/N: 3DB00734AA**). Refer to the following figure for the location of the female DB9 connector on TRU. The M1 indicates the jack location for rack lamp cable. Figure 2-25 TRU - connectors location

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

TRU illustration

The following figure shows the front view of the TRU.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-48 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Procedure to connect Rack lamp

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-26 TRU front view

Legend:

1

Red LED to indicate the presence of an URG alarm or CRITICAL alarm

2

Red LED to indicate the presence of an NURG alarm or MAJOR alarm

3

Yellow LED to indicate the presence of MEM alarm oor MINOR alarm

4

Green LED to indicate the presence of service call or service battery

5

Fuse breaker for rack lamp unit

Note: The BUZZLE LED is not used and kept off for current release.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-49 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Line Driver Port Attributes

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Line Driver Port Attributes Bi-directional Amplifier

Figure 2-27, “Bi-directional amplifier” (p. 2-50) is an example of bidirectional amplifier: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Set the opposite direction port of the line driver. Figure 2-27 Bi-directional amplifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Case of ILA: The Contra-dir is set between the Line ports of the same Line Driver. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Uni-directional Amplifier ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

The contra-dir should be set on the ports facing the Line Fiber. The opposite port of the Line IN of a Line Driver is the Line OUT of the other LD. Figure 2-28, “Uni-directional amplifier” (p. 2-50) is an example of uni-directional amplifier: set opposite direction port. Figure 2-28 Uni-directional amplifier

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-50 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Line Driver Port Attributes

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Case of End Terminal, Multi degree T/ROADM, ILA: The Contra-dir is set between the two Line ports of the 2 Line Drivers facing the Line fiber. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Case of Raman Pump RA2P: The Contra-dir is set between for the RA2P LINEIN port and Opposite LD LINEOUT port. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Setting Opposite Direction Port

Figure 2-29, “Set opposite direction port” (p. 2-51) shows how to set opposite direction port on the Web User Interface. Figure 2-29 Set opposite direction port

Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Open: Connections | Physical Topology ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select: {Line Driver}LINE port ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click: External ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select Direction: ( bi-dir Line Driver), --> (Uni-Dir Line Driver)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-51 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Line Driver Port Attributes

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Type: {far end NE loopback IP address shelf/slot/port}of the far end opposite direction port. Example: 152.148.66.244 1/2/4 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click OK. Figure 2-30 Create external connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select : Line Driver | LINE (IN or OUT) | Port Details[tab] | Opposite Port Direction ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Verify the Opposite Direction Port is correct. Note: If not correct, set the port. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-52 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Replacing a card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Replacing a card Slot equipage requirement

Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow. All slots in the shelf must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be fully inserted into the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty slot. Empty slots or partially inserted cards decrease the air flow across installed circuit packs and leads to decrease in their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure as their temperatures increases. Replacing a card (general)

NOTICE Service-disruption hazard A card reseat is service affecting if the card is currently carrying services. To discover if any services are currently carried over a card, perform the procedure Checking for services on a port in User Provisioning Guide. If there are services currently carried over the card, it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before reseating the card. Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Every slot in the subrack requires a circuit pack (card) or circuit pack blank to ensure proper airflow. Do not remove old cards until new cards are fully prepared for installation. New cards should be installed within 5 mins of old card removal to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the other cards within the subrack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Ensure that the replacement card is unpacked and prepared for immediate installation before starting any other work. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Set the fan to maximum speed. CLI

config fan maximum

WEBUI

FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Maximum

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-53 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Replacing a card

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Verify that you have an unobstructed extraction path. Tie back any adjacent fibers that are affected by the card extraction. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting and out. This partially unseats the card from the backplane. Note: For EC/Power filters, a metal latch is provided on the left; and for SFCs, no latches are available. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Hold the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot, being careful not to pull on any connected fibers on the NE. You will encounter some resistance while the card is seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling force to unseat the card from the backplane. Slide the card out of the slot. When the card is almost removed, place a hand under the card to avoid dropping it when it is fully removed from the shelf. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with Step 9. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Hold replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle force to fully seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-54 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Replacing a card

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Set the fan back to normal speed. CLI

config fan normal

WEBUI

FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Normal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Check the card for alarms: CLI

alm

Note: If the card software version does not match the NE software version, the card automatically upgrades to the correct software version. In this case, a software upgrade alarm is present. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure for getting normal display in Card properties

Note: For Asian users, the WebUI may miss displaying few characters in “Card properties” window. The following procedure is a work around to get a full display in Card properties window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the control panel, select Date, Time, Language, and Regional options. Result: The Date, Time, Language, and Regional options screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Regional and Language options icon and change system locale to English (United States). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Open Internet Explorer. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

In Internet Explorer select Tools > Internet Options > Fonts and select the Language script as Latin based.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-55 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Replacing a card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The above settings are effected and the full display of characters is seen in

Card properties window. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-56 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1DPP24M Installation procedures Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the 1DPP24M card installation. 1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. 2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If not installed, Refer to “Half-slot adapter installation” (p. 2-23) to install the Half-slot adapter. 3. Check the following figures to understand the E1 cable and it pin assignments.

E1 cable description

The following figures show the E1 cable and its pin number descriptions.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-57 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-31 E1 cable

Figure 2-32 E1 pin assignment table

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-58 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-33 E1 wire diagram

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 1DPP24M card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-59 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

If using two 1DPP24M in the same chassis, the white hook on the cable management should be removed before connect/fiber connector. Take out the cable/fibers from the hook. Loosen the two screw on the cable management, and take off the white hook and two screws. Keep it in a marked plastics bag for future use.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-60 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Plug the E1 cable into the E1/DS1 port of 1DPP24M and secure two screws on cable connector. Route the cable to the left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too tight. If there is only one E1 cable used, place it in the upper hook of cable management. If the cables are too tight to be bent, loosen the two screws on the cable management, and take off the white hook and the two screws.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you hear a “click” sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector used, go to Step 12. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-61 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

1DPP24M Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fiber together in an appropriate way.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-62 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting with the 11DPE12, 11DPE12A or 11DPE12E card installation. 1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. 2. Check the following figures to understand Timing cable and its pin assignments. Figure 2-34 11DPE12 card face plate

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-63 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-35 11DPE12A card views

Figure 2-36 11DPE12E card face plate

Timing cable description

The following figure shows the Timing cable and its pin number descriptions.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-64 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-37 Timing cable wire diagram

Table 2-5

Timing cable wire pin number description

X1

Color

Definition

Remark

Cable

1

Tip

BITS TX/RX_P

BITS TX/RX

W1

2

Braid

BITS TX/RX_N

3

White/Orange

1PPS_N

1PPS_N

W2

4

Orange

1PPS_P

1PPS_P

5

White/Green

GND

GND

6

Green

GND

GND

7

White/Blue

ToD_N

ToD_N

8

Blue

ToD_P

ToD_P

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 11DPE12, 11DPE12A or 11DPE12E card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-65 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-38 PSS4 shelf view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Plug the Timing cable into the CLK1/CLK2 port of 11DPE12A. Route the cable to the left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too tight. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Insert the SFP/XFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP/XFP module into the SFP/XFP slot. Push the front of the SFP/XFP module until you hear a “Click” sound, indicating the SFP/XFP module is securely locked into the SFP/XFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Inspect and clean the SFP/XFP modules after insertion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-66 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used go to Step 11. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fiber together in an appropriate way.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure that the cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack as shown in the following figure.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-67 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure Before you begin

Before starting the 11QPA4/11QPA4A card installation, refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. Figure 2-39 11QPA4 card views

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 11QPA4/11QPA4A card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-68 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-40 Lock the card

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Insert SFP/XFP modules, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP/XFP module into the SFP/XFP slot. Push the front of the SFP/XFP module until you hear a “click” sound, indicating the SFP/XFP module is securely locked into the SFP/XFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Inspect and clean the SFP/XFP modules after insertion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-69 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 10. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius. Figure 2-41 Angled boot fiber connector

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all the required ports with short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fibers together in an appropriate way. Figure 2-42 Connect fibers to ports

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-70 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Four pairs of ports on SFP and XFP need to be linked by jumpers. Refer Figure 2-43, “Ports linked by jumpers” (p. 2-71). Figure 2-43 Ports linked by jumpers

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-71 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-72 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPE24 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11QPE24 Installation procedure Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting with the 11QPE24 card installation. 1. Remove all the cards installed in slots 7/8/9/10. 2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot adapters. Figure 2-44 11QPE24 card views (1 of 2)

Figure 2-44 11QPE24 card views (2 of 2)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-73 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPE24 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 11QPE24 card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Hold the 11QPE24 card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Align the card lower PCB with the card guides in slot 7/9. The following Figure shows the orientation. Figure 2-45 PSS4 shelf view

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Insert the XFP/SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement XFP/SFP module into the XFP/SFP slot. Push the front of the XFP/SFP module until you hear a “Click” sound, indicating the XFP/SFP module is securely locked into the XFP/SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Inspect and clean the XFP/SFP modules after insertion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-74 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

11QPE24 Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 9. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the fiber together. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Ensure that the cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack as shown in the following figure.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-75 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

112PDM11 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

112PDM11 Installation procedure Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the 112PDM11 card installation: • • •

Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot adapter. The CFP module is not an FRU (Field Replaceable Unit); do not attempt to pull the CFP module out of the pack which can damage the connector for the CFP.

Figure 2-46 112PDM11 Card

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 112PDM11 card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-76 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

112PDM11 Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-47 Card locked in place

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Insert the SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you hear a "Click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-77 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

112PDM11 Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 10. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius. Figure 2-48 Angled boot fiber connector

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with the short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also, it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the fibers together in an appropriate way. Figure 2-49 Fibers connected to ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Ensure that the fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the extended shelf cover (Part Number: 3KC13331AA) carefully.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-78 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

112PDM11 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Notes: 1. The short shelf cover (3KC12890AA) cannot be used when 112PDM11 is seated in shelf. 2. If the shelf is mounted on ETSI rack, the door cannot be closed. Figure 2-50 Shelf cover

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-79 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the 4DPA2/4DPA4 card installation. 1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. 2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If not installed, refer to “Half-slot adapter installation” to install the Half-slot adapter. Figure 2-51 4DPA2 card face plate

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-80 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 4DPA2/4DPA4 card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle force to fully seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-52 Lock the card - 4DPA2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you hear a “click” sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-81 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Only short/ angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector used, go to Step 10. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the figure below to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fibers together in an appropriate way.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-82 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4QPA8 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4QPA8 Installation procedure Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the 4QPA8 card installation. • •

Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot adapter.

Figure 2-53 4QPA8 card

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-83 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4QPA8 Installation procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a 4QPA8 card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-54 Card locked in place

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-84 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4QPA8 Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Insert the SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you hear a "Click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 10. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius. Figure 2-55 Angled boot fiber connector

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with the short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also, it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the fibers together in an appropriate way. Figure 2-56 Fibers connected to ports

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-85 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

4QPA8 Installation procedure

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Ensure fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack. Figure 2-57 Shelf cover

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-86 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PTPCTL Installation procedures Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the PTPCTL card installation: 1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. 2. Check the following figures to understand the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and their pin assignments. Figure 2-58 PTPCTL card overview

The following figures show the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and its pin number descriptions.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-87 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-59 E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable

Table 2-6

E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram

X1

Color

Definition

Remark

Cable

1

Tip

BITS TX/RX_P

BITS TX/RX

W1

2

Braid

BITS TX/RX_N

3

White/Orange

1PPS_N

1PPS_N

W2

4

Orange

1PPS_P

1PPS_P

5

White/Green

GND

GND

6

Green

GND

GND

7

White/Blue

TOD_N

TOD_N

8

Blue

TOD_P

TOD_P

E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable description

The following figures show the E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and its pin number descriptions. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-88 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-60 E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable

Table 2-7

E1/DS1 2 MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram

X1

Color

Definition

Remark

Cable

1

White/Blue

BITS TX/RX_P

BITS TX/RX

W1

2

Blue

BITS TX/RX_N

3

White/Orange

1PPS_N

1PPS_N

W2

4

Orange

1PPS_P

1PPS_P

5

White/Green

GND

GND

6

Green

GND

GND

7

White/Blue

TOD_N

TOD_N

8

Blue

TOD_P

TOD_P

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-89 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a PTPCTL card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-61 Card locked in place

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Plug the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD or E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cables into the CLK1/CLK2 port of PTPCTL. Route the cable to the left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too tight.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-90 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Insert the SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you hear a "click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 11. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius. Figure 2-62 Angled boot fiber connector

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with the short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also, it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the fibers together in an appropriate way. Figure 2-63 Fibers connected to ports

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-91 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPCTL Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack. Figure 2-64 Shelf cover

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-92 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPIO Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PTPIO Installation procedures Before you begin

Refer to the following points before starting the PTPIO card installation: 1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed. 2. Check the following figures to understand the LC adaptors and their assignments. Figure 2-65 LC adaptors

LC interface description on front plate

The following figure shows the LC interface assignments:

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-93 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPIO Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 2-66 LC interface assignments

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to install a PTPIO card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue with the next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of the card PCB. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Align the card PCB with the card guides. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot. You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle force to seat the card on the backplane.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-94 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPIO Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place. Figure 2-67 Card locked in place

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber connector is used, go to Step 8. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius. Figure 2-68 Angled boot fiber connector

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-95 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

PTPIO Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with the short boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also, it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the fibers together in an appropriate way. Figure 2-69 Fibers connected to ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Ensure that the cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack. Figure 2-70 Shelf cover

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-96 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SPD Shelf Installation procedures Procedure

Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf in an ANSI equipment rack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Determine the mounting location, the PSS-4 SPD shelf should be mounted under the PSS-4 shelf. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

For 19 inch ANSI rack, attach 19 inch ANSI rack mounting ears 3KC13294AAAA to each side of the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf, using three M3 screws (1AD009040012) per side. See the following figure: Figure 2-71 SPD installation for a 19 inch ANSI rack

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-97 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For 23 inch ANSI rack, attach 23 inch ANSI rack mounting ears 3KC13295AAAA to each side of the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf, using three M3 screws (1AD009040012) per side. See the following figure: Figure 2-72 SPD installation for a 23 inch ANSI rack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Mount the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf in an ANSI rack, using two 12-24 screws (1AD139920001) per side. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for IBN applications. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-4. A ground cable is not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The ground wire should be 14 AWG (2.0 mm² cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 inch spacing.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-98 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground cable to the rear of the chassis. Figure 2-73 Bay frame

Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Connect one end of the customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Measure resistance between the case of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and the CBN or IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Ensure that the AC filter is properly installed in PSS-4 Slot2/Slot3.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-99 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Unpack the cable CA-AC Power Supply 3KC05127AXAA (X is variant for cable type, it depends on type of installation kits) and AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AA from installation kit. Figure 2-74 Power supply cable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Ensure no sides of these two items are connecting either power supply or AC filter cards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Plug the outlet of the cable CA-AC Power supply 3KC05127AXAA into the input connector of the SPD shelf unit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Plug one end of the AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AA into the output connector of the SPD shelf unit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-100 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Plug the connector of the AC CABLE ADAPTOR into the power input port of the AC filter and ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure: Figure 2-75 Plugging the connector

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-101 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Use cable tie1AD000100022 to tie the cable to the handle of the SPD unit. Figure 2-76 Cable tie

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

The left SPD unit connects to the left AC filter, and the right SPD unit connects to the right AC filter. Figure 2-77 SPD unit connects to the AC filter

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-102 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Route the cable and secure towards AC power supply. Place the plug of the cable ‘CA-AC Power Supply’ near the outlet of the AC power supply. Do not plug it into the AC power outlet before following steps. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Ensure that the cable routing near AC filter is not too tight. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Ensure that the switch of the AC filter is in ‘OFF’ status. If not, use 0# screw driver to turn it off as shown in the following figure: Figure 2-78 AC filter switch - OFF status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Verify that the designated AC power source outlet is surge protected. Refer to the “Power filters” (p. 2-202) for the AC power source specification. Refer the site engineering specification for any additional site specific AC requirements. Connect the other end of the cable ‘CA-AC Power Supply’ to the outlet of AC power supply.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-103 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Turn the switch of the AC filter ‘ON’ with 0# screw driver as shown in the following figure: Figure 2-79 AC filter switch - ON status

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-104 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Shelf cover installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Shelf cover installation Before you begin

Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. For details and ordering information, see 1830 PSS-4 installation kits in Product Information and Planning Guide. Note: There are two front covers for 1830 PSS-4 shelf, the standard cover is: 3KC12890AAAC, the extended cover is: 3KC13331AAAA. When 112PDM11 pack is used in 1830 PSS-4 shelf, the extended cover should be ordered; the procedure of installation is the same as that of the standard cover shown below. Procedure for shelf cover installation

Complete the following steps to install the shelf cover. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Ensure all cables including power chords, fibers, and cables are well connected and routed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Hook the shelf cover as shown in the following figure so as to include all the cables.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-105 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Shelf cover installation

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Place the two bottom pillars of shelf cover into the bottom hooks of shelf, and ensure that no fibers from the left of shelf cover are in the way.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Place the shelf cover in position and ensure that no cables or fibers are in the way. Secure the captive screw on the right side. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Secure the captive screw in the left side with one #1 Philips screw driver with 200 mm shank or longer. Ensure no cables or fibers are in the way. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure for removing shelf cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Loosen the captive screw on the right with thumb or #1 Philips screw driver with 200 mm shank or longer.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-106 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Shelf cover installation

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Similarly, loosen the captive screw on the left side. Ensure that no cables or fibers from the left of shelf cover are in the way. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Take the shelf cover off from the shelf by tilting the top portion towards the front as shown in the following figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Remove the bottom pillars of the shelf cover from the bottom hooks. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-107 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Equipment Installation

Shelf cover installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 2-108 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

3

3an and air filter F installation

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides instructions for installation and replacement of the fan and air filter. Contents Fan installation and replacement

3-2

Fan air filter replacement

3-4

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fan and air filter installation

Fan installation and replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan installation and replacement Fan installation and replacement procedure

CAUTION Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades. Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans. The following procedure describes how to replace the fan module of the 1830 PSS-4. To install a fan module in an empty shelf, only perform steps 3 and 4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Completely loosen the fan module retaining screw.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fan and air filter installation

Fan installation and replacement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Grasp the handle of the fan module and pull it straight out of the 1830 PSS-4 unit. Figure 3-1 1830 PSS-4 fan module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To install the new or replacement fan module align it with the opening in the 1830 PSS-4 unit, and slide it straight into the unit until it seats with the internal power connector. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Completely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fan and air filter installation

Fan air filter replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan air filter replacement NOTICE Equipment damage Potential equipment damage Before installing or removing the filter, check that the protective adhesive film has been removed. Fan air filter replacement procedure

CAUTION Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades. Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.

CAUTION Contamination possible Contamination can be drawn into the unit when the fan filter is removed. To prevent the possibility of contamination being drawn into the unit when the fan filter is removed fans must be temporarily shut down before the replacement of the filter. It is important that the new fan filter is installed and the fans restarted within 120 secs to prevent overheating of circuit components. Air filters on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 units should be replaced at 3-month intervals or sooner if necessary. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Remove the subrack cover. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Completely loosen the air filter cover retaining screw and remove cover.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fan and air filter installation

Fan air filter replacement

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Grasp the end of the air filter and pull it straight out of the 1830 PSS-4 unit as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-2 Air filter removal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Align the new air filter with the opening in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 unit, and slide it straight into the unit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Install the cover and completely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fan and air filter installation

Fan air filter replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 3-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

4

Stand-alone node set-up 4

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes how to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-4 (PSS-4) network element (NE). Contents Required materials

4-2

Preconditioning

4-6

Connect to the NE and initialize database

4-7

Connect to the NE for CLI access

4-12

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

4-14

Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

4-23

Set the loopback IP address

4-24

Configure networking information

4-26

Configure GNE for management system access

4-31

Set the network element date and time

4-38

Disable the ES port monitoring

4-44

Firmware Update

4-47

Update firmware on all circuit packs

4-49

Circuit Pack Handling

4-49

Configure additional system properties

4-55

Example configuration of FTP server

4-57

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Required materials

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Required materials Overview

This section provides procedures to download and activate Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software on a new NE. Service disruption caution

These procedures should be completed on a new NE only. Existing provisioning on the NE including any traffic is lost. Required materials

The following items are required: • •

Personal computer (PC) running Windows 2000 or XP The following software is loaded on the PC. – Internet Explorer version 6 or greater – SUN Java Runtime Environment version 5 or greater

• •

– Telnet application – FTP server software 10/100 BaseT LAN card Shielded RJ45 CIT cable

• • •

New CIT cable ESD wrist strap Shielded RJ45 straight-through cable Note: It is important that the RJ45 cable be shielded. Unshielded RJ45 cables do not provide adequate protection to the system hardware.

Table 4-1

CIT cable pin assignments

X1

X2

Color

1

3

white/green

2

6

white/orange

3

1

white/blue

6

2

white/brown

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Required materials

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-1 CIT cable

Figure 4-2 New CIT cable

Legend:

X1

RJ45 to connect to EC CIT port

X2

RJ45 to connect PC LAN port for CIT

X3

DB9 connector to connect PC series port for debugging

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Required materials

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-3 New CIT cable

Release change notices

Review the Customer Release Notes for information about changes in the most recent release. Precautions and recommendations

Ensure that you read and understand the following: •

Read the entire software installation procedure before beginning.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Required materials

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If installing or upgrading to software associated with a new release, read and follow the instructions in the Customer Release Notes for that release. • • • •

The person performing the software installation must be trained and have an understanding of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 system. Perform the software installation procedure in the sequence provided; any deviation may lead to unpredictable Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 behavior. Use care when handling circuit packs. Use ESD wrist straps and static-safe bags. Note: Graphics and screen illustrations utilized in this section may not contain current release designations. They are for reference only.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Preconditioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preconditioning Purpose

The following procedure helps to ensure that the NE has been installed properly and is ready for software installation. Procedure

If this is a multi-shelf system, the following steps should be performed on each of the shelves. At this time, the shelf ID setting on all shelves should be 1 (Master). Also, the intershelf cables should remain disconnected. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify that the shelf ID setting on all shelves is 1 (Master), and that the inter-shelf cables are disconnected. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted correctly. Verify that the fibers are properly connected between packs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure that it is connected properly. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Verify that the shelf is powered up, the green LED is lit on both power filter modules, and the fans are running. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Seat all circuit packs and modules except for Optical Transponder (OT) or Line Driver (LD) circuit packs. OT and LD circuit packs should be inserted after the software has been activated and committed. Note: When installing the EC circuit pack, ensure that the screws on the faceplate are fastened to facilitate the installation of circuit packs below the EC. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE and initialize database

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect to the NE and initialize database Purpose

You can connect directly to the network element (NE) to access the web interface (WebUI). No client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is shipped with software and a factory image. This procedure provides the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using WebUI and creating an initial database. Procedure

Note: SUN Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the PC. Note: Popup blockers must be turned off in Internet Explorer. Note: The network element is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port must be configured to obtain an IP address automatically. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Connect one end of the CIT cable to the CIT port on the EC of the master shelf. Connect the other end of the CIT cable to the Ethernet port on your PC. Note: All shelves in a multi-shelf system should be set as master. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and . Verify that the IP address assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.x. See Figure 4-4, “PC command window” (p. 4-7). Figure 4-4 PC command window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the CIT port in the Address bar. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE and initialize database

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Go. Result: The browser connects to the network element and the WebUI login window is

displayed. Figure 4-5 Login Screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Enter admin in the User: field and admin in the Password: field. Then click Login. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

A warning message appears. If there is no warning message, go to Step 11.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE and initialize database

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

If the warning is similar to Figure 4-6, “WebUI invalid database warning” (p. 4-9), click Initialize at the bottom and then continue to Step 10. Figure 4-6 WebUI invalid database warning

If the warning only shows the DBINVALID alarm without “Initialize” option, then continue to Step 8. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Open a CLI session using the procedure “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Clear the database by typing config database clear command and . Type Yes and , when prompted at the warning message. The sample output is as shown in the following: WARNING: This is service affecting. After the database has been erased the system will automatically restart. Are you sure you want to erase the database (yes, no)? yes

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-9 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE and initialize database

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

The system will restart on its own after initialization. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

The system prompts you for a new NE name as shown in Figure 4-7, “WebUI NE name prompt” (p. 4-10). Type the NE name provided in the site documentation. Figure 4-7 WebUI NE name prompt

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click Submit and the system restarts. Result: The restart takes about 2-15 mins. A window appears showing the restart

progress as shown in Figure 4-8, “WebUI NE restart progress window” (p. 4-10). Figure 4-8 WebUI NE restart progress window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

After restart is complete, log back in to the webUI interface and the system properties view is opened.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-10 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE and initialize database

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Check if a No committed software load alarm exists. If the alarm is present, continue to Step 15. If the alarm is not present, go to Step 18. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

In the WebUI, select Administration -> Software -> Upgrade. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Select Commit for the Action Type and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Click Refresh and verify the command completed and the Committed Release is populated. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

If there are additional shelves in the system, repeat Step 1 through Step 13 for each shelf in the system. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-11 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE for CLI access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connect to the NE for CLI access Overview

You can connect directly to the network element to access the CLI. No client software is needed on your PC, only a telnet application. The remaining procedures in this chapter are completed using CLI. Procedure

You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access the CLI using the CIT port on the EC. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT port is active on the master shelf only. Note this is the same connection used for the webUI interface. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the EC. Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address of the CIT port. •

The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Press and the login: prompt appears. Type cli and . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type cli at the Password: prompt and Enter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

This starts the CLI interface, and another Username: prompt appears. Type admin and Enter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

At the Password: prompt, type admin and . This brings up the following warning notice. 1830 PSS-4, WAVELENGTH TRACKER Alcatel-Lucent (c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. Welcome to the CLI Warning Notice This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-12 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE for CLI access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized users are subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or criminal and civil penalties under state, federal, or other applicable domestic and foreign laws. Use of this system may be monitored and recorded for administrative and security reasons. Anyone accessing this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised that if monitoring reveals possible evidence of criminal activity, Alcatel-Lucent may provide the evidence of such activity to law enforcement officials. All users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent Corporate Instructions regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent information assets. Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Type Y and . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

The current alarm summary is displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI commands can now be entered. Type ? for a list of commands. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-13 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software Purpose

The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that is run in the network. Perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct software load on the NE. The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first step is to prepare the FTP server on the NE. Then follow the CLI procedure for software download and activation. Note: Software download is only supported through the OAMP port. Starting from Release 5.0 software download is supported through the CIT port. (See Configure the OAMP Ethernet Port in User Provisioning Guide for connection details. Connection of a CIT port on a slave shelf to an external LAN is forbidden.) Note: In multi-shelf installations, the slave EC and Master NE must be installed and committed with same software load. OAMP port configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Login to CLI. See the procedure in “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config interface 1/1/oamp ip / and . Where is the IP address and represents the subnet mask following the CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation. Note: The port must be enabled for this command to take effect. To enable the port, type config interface ec 1/1/oamp state up and . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Change the TCP/IP properties on the PC from Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) to a static IP address within the same subnet as the address provisioned in Step 2. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Disconnect the CIT cable from the EC CIT port and the PC. Connect a straight-through Ethernet cable to the OAMP port and the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on the PC.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-14 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Login to CLI, but this time Telnet to the IP address provisioned for the OAMP port. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

FTP server preparation

Note: Refer to “Example configuration of FTP server” (p. 4-57) for more detailed instructions on configuring an FTP server. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the User ID and password established for the account. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Establish a root directory for the server and ensure that it has read and write privileges. You can create a folder in the root directory that contains the NE software. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Copy the folder and subfolders with the NE software into the FTP root directory established as in Step 2. Note: The software folder name has the format 1830PSS4-, where is the version of software to be loaded. There should also be two subfolders named “1830PSS4” and “1830PSS4M”. The software typically is provided on a CD. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-15 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PC preparation ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 4-9, “Windows Firewall settings” (p. 4-16). Figure 4-9 Windows Firewall settings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Off. Then click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and . Note the IP address assigned by the NE to your PC. This is used later in the procedure. See Figure 4-4, “PC command window” (p. 4-7). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-16 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type config software server ip and . Where is the IP address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the IP address you obtained when using the ipconfig command. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config software server userid and . Where is the user id of the user account defined on the FTP server. Sample output is as shown in the following: Enter password: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type and . Where is the password for user account defined on the FTP server. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type config software server root and . Where is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory. Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Type config software server detail and . Sample output is shown in the following: Software Software Software Software

Server Server Server Server

Protocol IP Userid Root Directory

: : : :

FTP 172.16.0.2 sw1 /

Verify that the settings are correct. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Type config software upgrade status and . Sample output is shown in the following: Software Upgrade Information: Software Server IP Software Server Root Directory Committed Release Working Release Directory

: 172.16.0.2 : / : :

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-17 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Working Release : 1830PSS4-0.00-2 Active Release : 1830PSS41-0.00-2/ Operation : Operation Status : Upgrade Path Available : True Software Download Script (Timezone: ):

Verify that the current active software is an older release than the software that you are loading. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Type config software upgrade manual audit nobackup and . Where is the directory name on the PC containing the software. This checks the path and verifies that the system is ready for upgrade. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Type config software upgrade status and . Result: A listing of packs is displayed along with the status showing which packs need to be upgraded. Sample output is shown in the following: Software Upgrade Information: Software Server IP : 192.168.0.241 Software Server Root Directory : /SVT/ Committed Release : 1830PSS4-4.8-50 Working Release Directory : Working Release : 1830PSS4-4.8-50 Active Release : 1830PSS4-4.8-50 Operation : Audit Operation Status : Completed Upgrade Path Available : True Software Download Script (Timezone: ): Stage=0 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete RESULT: Success Stage=1 Step=0 SH/SL: 0/0 CARDTYPE: Empty ACTION: Transfer to disk Planned 0% complete RESULT: None Stage=2 Step=0 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC ACTION: Activate Planned 0% complete RESULT: None ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path Available changes to True.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-18 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Type config software upgrade manual load and . Result: This transfers the software to the NE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Type config software upgrade status and . Watch for the following lines. ... Operation Operation Status ...

: Load : In Progress 0%

Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Type config software upgrade manual activate and . Result: This activates the software on the 1830 PSS-4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

The NE reboots and the Telnet connection drops. Wait for about 30 mins after the fan speed drops back down to normal speed and login to the NE. (This is applicable for pre 3.6.0 releases). Wait for 1 min after EC LED stops blinking green and log back in to the NE. (This is applicable for 3.6.0 and later) Refer to “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Type config software upgrade status and . Watch for the following lines. ... Operation Operation Status ...

: Activate : In Progress 0%

Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

The NE may have a DBINVALID alarm. If the alarm is not present, go to Step 18. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Clear the database by typing config database clear and . Type yes and when prompted at the warning message.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-19 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example: Sample output is as shown in the following: WARNING: This is service affecting. After the database has been erased the system will automatically restart. Are you sure you want to erase the database (yes, no)? yes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

The system will automatically restart after initialization. Log in to the CLI after the restart is complete. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Type config software upgrade commit and . Result: This commits the software to be the primary release. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Type config software upgrade status and . Watch for the following lines. ... Operation Operation Status .

: Commit : In Progress 0%

Continue to execute the status command until the Operations Status shows Completed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

After the last status command is executed, verify that the new software release is displayed as the committed, working, and active release. See the following sample output: Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2 Software Server Root Directory : / Committed Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0 Working Release Directory : 1830PSS4-6.0-0/ Working Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0 Active Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0 Operation : Commit Operation Status : Completed Upgrade Path Available : True Software Download Script(Timezone: ):

Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Insert OT and LD circuit packs at this time. Insert one at a time allowing each circuit pack to boot before inserting the next.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-20 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

If this is a multi-shelf system, repeat from Step 1 of “OAMP port configuration” (p. 4-14), through Step 21 for each shelf in the system. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Connect to peer shelves ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If this is a multi-shelf system, perform the following steps to connect each of the peer shelves to the master. If there is only a single master shelf, skip to Step 9. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Connect the PC to the master shelf with the CIT cable and login to CLI following “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). Note: Do not connect either the CIT port or the OAMP port of the peer shelf to a LAN. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Power down the next peer shelf to be added and set the shelf ID according the settings shown in Table 4-2, “Shelf ID and settings” (p. 4-21). Ensure that there is no duplicate shelf ID on peer shelf. Connecting shelves with duplicate shelf ID will cause the NE to continuously reboot. Table 4-2

Shelf ID and settings

Shelf

Shelf ID setting

Master

1

Peer shelf 1

2

Peer shelf 2

3

Peer shelf 3

4

Peer shelf 4

5

Peer shelf 5

6

Peer shelf 6

7

Peer shelf 7

8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Power up the shelf again.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-21 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Connect the ES1 port of the peer shelf to the ES2 port of the previous shelf in the system using a cross-over cable. Note: Never configure the system in a closed ring topology (a cable connected from the last shelf back to the master shelf). This can cause a broadcast storm leading to system instability. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Wait for 10 mins and type sh shelf * and . Verify the new shelf shows in the inventory. Note: If new shelf information cannot be retrieved or master shelf starts to reboot, check the shelfID and cross-over cable of the new shelf . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Type alm and . Verify that there are no unexpected alarms. Note: There can be link down alarms on unconnected ES1/ES2 ports. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

If there are additional peer shelves to be added go to Step 3. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

The system is now ready for provisioning. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-22 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the NE to operate in SDH mode Background

The network element defaults to SONET mode. Perform this procedure only if you want the network element to operate in SDH mode. Note: This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up. Procedure

If you want the network element to operate in SONET mode, skip to “Set the loopback IP address” (p. 4-24). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type show version and . Sample output: Software Version: 1830PSS4-6.0 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Copy the string after “Software Version:” This is used as the password for the SDH mode command. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type config admin mode sdh and . Where is the password copied in the previous step. Result: The following Warning message appears. WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database to be cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to be deleted. Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type yes and . Result: You are logged out. The procedure is complete. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-23 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the loopback IP address

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the loopback IP address Purpose

Each network element (NE) requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using the CLI, continue to “Procedure - CLI” (p. 4-24). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using the WebUI, continue to “Procedure - WebUI” (p. 4-24). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure - CLI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type config interface loopback ip /32 and . Where is the IP address. Obtain this information from the site documentation. Result: The following warning message appears. WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result in a warm reset of this network element. Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type yes and . Result: The CLI session is terminated. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Follow the CLI login procedure described in “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure - WebUI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, click System on the left pane.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-24 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the loopback IP address

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The System Properties screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Enter the loopback IP address in Loopback IP: box. Note: The default loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the loopback Subnet mask in Loopback Subnet Mask: box. Note: The default loopback subnet mask is 255.255.255.255 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the SNMP source as Loopback IP only from the list. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click Submit. Note: If the Loopback IP, Loopback Subnet Mask and/or SNMP Source is changed, the WebUI displays the following warning message. The user will be allowed to continue with the modify request or cancel. Upon continuing with the request, the WebUI will send the modify request to the NE and logout the user. Result: The WebUI displays the following warning message. “Warning: You are about to change the Loopback IP, Subnet Mask and/or SNMP Source. This will cause a warm reboot of the Network Element and all users will be logged off. Continue?” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select Yes to continue. Result: The session is terminated and the user is logged out. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-25 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure networking information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure networking information Loopback IP address

Follow these steps to configure the loopback IP address. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select System and then Details tab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Enter the Loopback IP address (customer provided) and Loopback Subnet Mask (255.255.255.255). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Click Submit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click OK at the Warning. The system will reboot (around 2 minutes.) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Log back in to the WebUI when the system is back up. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

GNE OAMP IP address

If the NE will act as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) then the OAMP port must be provisioned and activated using the following procedure. Note: Verify that the GNE is disconnected from the customer OSS LAN to ensure that the customer does not log in to the NE during turn-up. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the equipment tree expand Shelf 1 | EC | OAMP and select the Port Details tab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Enter the OAMP IP address and subnet mask. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Check Port Enabled. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Submit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-26 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure networking information

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If the customer is using...

Then ...

Static Routes for GNE OAMP connection

Proceed with Step 6.

OSPF Routing for GNE OAMP connection

Proceed to “OSPF routing configuration” (p. 4-28).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Create a static route to the Default Gateway. Select Administration | Networking | IP Routes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Create. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Check the Default Route box: Figure 4-10 Default route box

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

In the Next Hop address enter the default gateway IP address provided by the customer. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Check the Redistribute box. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click Apply. The default route is created: Figure 4-11 Default route

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-27 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure networking information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

OSPF routing configuration

Use this procedure to configure the OSPF routing only if the customer is using OSPF, and not static routes, to manage the data communication network. Refer “GNE OAMP IP address” (p. 4-26). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the equipment tree expand Shelf 1 | EC | OAMP port and select the OSPF Details tab. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Set the OSPF Routing to Enable. Click Submit. Verify from customer DCN information that the DCN is using OSPF area 0. Note: If the customer is not using OSPF area 0, then the required area must be created. See Steps 4-7. Figure 4-12 OSPF settings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Refresh this screen until the OSPF Adjacency State is Full. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If you need to create an OSPF Area other than default Area 0, in the equipment tree view select Administration | Networking | OSPF Areas.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-28 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure networking information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select Create. Figure 4-13 Create OSPF Area

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Define the OSPF Area. Define the Area Type attributes. Stub - A stub area is an area which does not receive route advertisements external to the autonomous system (AS) and routing from within the area is based entirely on a default route. Nonstub is normal OSPF operation (that is, 1.1.1.254). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click Apply, then Close. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

In the equipment tree view select Administration | Networking | OSPF Areas. Verify that new OSPF Area is created: Figure 4-14 New OSPF area created

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-29 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure networking information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-30 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure GNE for management system access Background

The NE, if configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE), can connect to an Element Management System (EMS) through the OAMP port. The IP address must be provisioned and the OAMP port enabled to use this port. In addition, an IP route must be established to route connections to the RNEs. Purpose

Use this procedure to provision and enable the OAMP port, so that the NE can act as a Gateway Network Element. The procedure also provisions the IP route information to allow connection to RNEs. Not all NEs (that is, RNEs) require this provisioning. Refer to the site documentation. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using WebUI, continue to “WebUI Procedure” (p. 4-31). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using CLI, continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 4-36). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

WebUI Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Expand “Shelf 1” in the equipment tree and then expand “Slot 1: EC”. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select OAMP.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-31 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Port Interface Settings window appears as shown in Figure 4-15,

“WebUI OAMP port provisioning” (p. 4-32). Figure 4-15 WebUI OAMP port provisioning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the IP address and subnet mask as indicated in the site documentation. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Check the Port Enabled check-box. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click Submit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-32 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select Administration -> Networking -> IP Routes from the top menu as shown in Figure 4-16, “WebUI IP routes menu” (p. 4-33). Figure 4-16 WebUI IP routes menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-33 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The IP Routes window is displayed as shown in Figure 4-17, “WebUI IP

routes window” (p. 4-34). Figure 4-17 WebUI IP routes window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Create.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-34 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create IP Routes window is displayed as shown in Figure 4-18, “WebUI

Create IP route window” (p. 4-35). Figure 4-18 WebUI Create IP route window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Enter IP address of the destination host or network in Destination IP: field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Enter IP subnet mask of the route in Mask: field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Enter IP address of the next interface in the route, also known as the gateway address in Next Hop: field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Enter the distance between the hops in the Distance: field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click Apply.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-35 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Verify that the new IP route is now shown in the IP routes window as shown in Figure 4-19, “WebUI IP routes window with new route” (p. 4-36). Figure 4-19 WebUI IP routes window with new route

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

CLI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Configure the OAMP Ethernet port. (Also see, Configure the OAMP Ethernet port in User Provisioning Guide. Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp ip / and . Where is the IP address and represents the subnet mask following the CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp state up and Enter, to set the state of the interface to up. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp routestate enabled and , to enable routing on the interface.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-36 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure GNE for management system access

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type config cn routes static add / and , to create static IP route. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-37 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set the network element date and time Purpose

Use this procedure to set the network element (NE) date and time manually, by using the network element internal clock, or by synchronizing the network element with a network time protocol (NTP) server. The following procedure performs the initial setting manually. Manual procedure to set NE date and time ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using the WebUI, continue to “WebUI procedure” (p. 4-38). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using the CLI, continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 4-39). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

WebUI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, select Administration > Date and Time as shown in the following figure.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-38 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Date and Time Administration screen appears as shown in the following

figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Enter the current date, time, and time zone settings and click Apply. Note: All current WebUI users are logged off. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

CLI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type config general date and . Where is of the format yyyy mm dd ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config general time and . Where is of the format hh mm ss, and hh is between 0 and 23, mm is between 0 and 59, and ss is between 0 and 59. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

NTP configuration procedure

Use this procedure to configure each network element to use up to three NTP servers, indexed by number. The network element automatically selects the highest stratum NTP server with which it can reliably communicate. If the network element loses communications with and NTP server, it automatically selects the next best available server. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-39 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using the WebUI, continue to “NTP WebUI procedure” (p. 4-40). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using the CLI, continue to “NTP CLI procedure” (p. 4-42). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

NTP WebUI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, select Administration > NTP > Servers. Result: The NTP Servers screen is displayed as shown in the following figure. Figure 4-20 NTP Servers screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Create to add an NTP server.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-40 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create NTP Server screen is displayed. Figure 4-21 Create NTP Server screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the Server IP and click Apply to submit the changes. Result: A new NTP server is created. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

To activate the new NTP server, select Administration > NTP > Properties.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-41 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Network Time Protocol Properties screen is displayed as shown in the

following figure. Figure 4-22 Network Time Protocol Properties screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the NTP Enabled: and click Apply. Wait for a minute and then the NE can be synchronized with the NTP server. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

NTP CLI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type config general ntp add and . Where is the index number of the server and is the IP address of the server. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config general ntp status enable. Reference: Use this command to activate the NTP server. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type show general ntp details.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-42 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference: Use this command to view the NTP details. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-43 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Disable the ES port monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disable the ES port monitoring Procedure

Use this procedure to disable the ES port monitoring on the EC card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using the WebUI, continue to “WebUI procedure” (p. 4-44). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using the CLI, continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 4-46). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

WebUI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Expand Shelf 1 in the equipment tree and then expand each of the EC packs. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select an ES port (ES1 or ES2). Result: The ES port provisioning window appears as shown in the following figure.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-44 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Disable the ES port monitoring

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

A Link down alarm is raised against the ES port when it is enabled. (See the following figure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Clear the Port Enabled check-box and click Submit. (See the following figure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

The link down alarm on ES port is cleared. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-45 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Disable the ES port monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLI procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type show interface ec 1/1/ES1 or show interface ec 1/1/es2 and . Verify the ES1 or ES2 port admin and link integrity state. The port admin default state is UP. The Link Integrity state is down unless a LAN cable is connected to an extension shelf. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type alm and . Verify that there is a link down alarm on ES1 or ES2 unless a LAN cable is connected to an extension shelf. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type config interface ec 1/1/es1 state down or config interface ec 1/1/es2 state down and . Disable the ES1 or ES2 Port Monitoring. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type alm and . Verify that the link down alarm is cleared on ES1 or ES2 unless a LAN cable is connected to an extension shelf. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-46 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Firmware Update

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Firmware Update Introduction

Firmware update can be done in two manners: •

Perform a cold reboot of the NE, which will automatically update the firmware on all cards connected. See “Automatic Firmware Update” (p. 4-47)below.

•

Perform a cold reboot the OT card, which need firmware update.

•

Choose the firmware profile required. See “Manually Select Firmware Profile” (p. 4-47) and “Automatic Firmware Update” (p. 4-47).

Automatic Firmware Update

Follow these steps to initiate a cold reboot of the NE to update the firmware on all cards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI select System | Reboot | Cold Reboot. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Submit, then OK. Note: The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes depending on the number of cards requiring a firmware upgrade. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Manually Select Firmware Profile

Follow the steps below to check and select the firmware profiles of the cards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI select Reports | firmware. Figure 4-23 Firmware

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Verify the firmware profiles assigned to the cards. Perform the remaining steps for each card that needs its firmware modified.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-47 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Firmware Update

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the card in the equipment tree. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the Firmware tab, then Provision release. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the requested firmware profile. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click Submit. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-48 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Update firmware on all circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Update firmware on all circuit packs Purpose

This procedure ensures that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Type config admin resetNE cold and . Result: The following Warning message appears. WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart. This is a service affecting command. Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type yes and . Result: The NE reboots. The reboot takes several minutes, depending on the number

of circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type show firmware upgrade. Result: The firmware upgrade starts. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type show firmware NE Result: The firmware status (Loaded or none) is shown for each card. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Circuit Pack Handling Recommended Handling (Older Style)

Figure 4-24, “Circuit pack handling - Example 1” (p. 4-50) and Figure 4-25, “Circuit pack handling - Example 2” (p. 4-50) are the older styles of OAs/LDs, without protective shield covering the printed circuit board. Figure 4-24, “Circuit pack handling - Example 1” (p. 4-50): Proper handling of the circuit pack by the edge of the faceplate and by the edge of the printed circuit board. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-49 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Circuit Pack Handling

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-24 Circuit pack handling - Example 1

Figure 4-25, “Circuit pack handling - Example 2” (p. 4-50): Proper handling of the circuit pack by the edges of the printed circuit board Figure 4-25 Circuit pack handling - Example 2

Recommended Handling (Newer Style)

Figure 4-26, “Circuit pack handling - Example 3” (p. 4-51) and Figure 4-27, “Circuit pack handling - Example 4” (p. 4-51) are the new styles of OAs/LDs, with protective shield covering the printed circuit board. Figure 4-26, “Circuit pack handling - Example 3” (p. 4-51): Proper handling of the circuit pack by the edge of the faceplate and by the edge of the printed circuit board.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-50 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Circuit Pack Handling

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-26 Circuit pack handling - Example 3

Figure 4-27, “Circuit pack handling - Example 4” (p. 4-51): Proper handling of the circuit pack by the faceplate latches. Figure 4-27 Circuit pack handling - Example 4

Improper Handling

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-51 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Circuit Pack Handling

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

DO NOT: Do not mishandle circuit boards. It is possible to damage internal fibers and components on Line Driver (LD) and Optical Amplifier (OA) circuit packs if they are physically mishandled. Figure 4-28, “Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5” (p. 4-52): Improper handling of the circuit pack - Left thumb is placed such that undue damage may occur to the internal fibers that run under the ribbon cable. Figure 4-28 Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5

Figure 4-29, “Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6” (p. 4-53): Improper handling of the circuit pack - Fingers are placed on the horizontal surface of the board. This may cause undue damage to fibers or components on the pack.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-52 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Circuit Pack Handling

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-29 Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6

OSC SFP Equipage

DO NOT: Do not mishandle circuit boards. It is possible to damage internal fibers and components on Line Driver (LD) and Optical Amplifier (OA) circuit packs if they are physically mishandled. When equipping the OSC SFP, read and understand the Optical Amplifier/Line Driver installation section of the 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide. Set the LD/OA flat on an electrostatic discharge (ESD) safe work surface before attempting to remove or equip the OSC SFP.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-53 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Circuit Pack Handling

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-30 Proper LC Connector Handling

Figure 4-31 Broken OSC Fibers

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-54 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure additional system properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure additional system properties Purpose

Use this procedure to make changes to system properties including temperature units and AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and is the default for all ports; the value can be overridden on each individual port. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If using the CLI, continue to “Procedure - CLI” (p. 4-55). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If using the WebUI, continue to “Procedure - WebUI” (p. 4-55). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure - CLI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer and . Where is of the format []. You can also type config general ainstimer help for the default value and range. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit, type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and . E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure - WebUI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, click System on the left pane. Result: The System Properties screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

To modify the AINS timer value, select the AINS timer value in hours and minutes from the list.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-55 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Configure additional system properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The maximum value supported is 96 hours. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

To modify the temperature unit setting, select from Temperature Units: list. The default temperature unit is Celsius and can be changed to Fahrenheit. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click Submit to update the changes. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-56 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example configuration of FTP server Background

There are different FTP server software applications available. This procedure provides detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms, FileZilla. However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other FTP server applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for detailed instructions. Note: 1. The FTP server for software download and Database Backup are configured separately. FTP/SFTP can be provisioned for Software download server, and TFTP/FTP/TFTP can be provisioned for Database Backup server. 2. Note that TFTP is sensitive to the number of the GCC/OSC spans, but SFTP/FTP is not. Therefore, for DB back-up case, TFTP is not recommended for multi-span configuration over GCC/OSC. Generally, SFTP/FTP is recommended for multi-span download/backup case. 3. FTP and SFTP has a similar transfer speed for both DB backup and Software download. Generally, FTP is faster than SFTP, as it has a higher overhead efficiency. 4. However, Note that FTP has Windows/Linux Compatibility issue for Software download . If the FTP Server is a Windows Server, the download speed will be reduced by half . The SFTP Sever is generally working fine in both Windows/Linux for both Software downloading and DB backup. Purpose

This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in “FTP server preparation” (p. 4-15). Prerequisites

The FTP server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla server software can be downloaded from (http://filezillaproject.org/download.php?type= server). Procedure

Disable the firewall on the PC ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-57 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Off. Then click OK. FTP server configuration using FileZilla ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Start the FileZilla server software. Result: The Connect to Server screen opens as shown in Figure 4-32, “FileZilla

connect to server window” (p. 4-58). Figure 4-32 FileZilla connect to server window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Leave the default settings and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-58 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The server screen opens as shown in Figure 4-33, “FileZilla server window”

(p. 4-59). Figure 4-33 FileZilla server window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-59 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 4-34, “FileZilla groups menu” (p. 4-60). Figure 4-34 FileZilla groups menu

Result: The Groups screen opens as shown in Figure 4-35, “FileZilla groups window”

(p. 4-60). Figure 4-35 FileZilla groups window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-60 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

With the General page highlighted in the left pane, click Add on the right pane. Result: The Add user group dialog screen opens as shown in Figure 4-36, “FileZilla

add group window” (p. 4-61). Figure 4-36 FileZilla add group window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Enter a group name in the Add user group dialog screen and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-61 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select the Shared folders page in the left pane and the Groups screen changes as shown in Figure 4-37, “FileZilla groups shared folders window” (p. 4-62). Figure 4-37 FileZilla groups shared folders window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-62 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click Add and a browse screen opens as shown in Figure 4-38, “FileZilla browse folder window” (p. 4-63). Figure 4-38 FileZilla browse folder window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Browse to the folder where Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied to, and select it. Then click OK. Note: Create a folder, if needed, for the software before performing this step. Result: The folder appears in the directories screen. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

With the newly added folder selected, ensure that the Read and Write check-boxes are selected. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click Set as home dir. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Click OK to close the screen.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-63 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 4-39, “FileZilla users menu” (p. 4-64). Figure 4-39 FileZilla users menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-64 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Users screen opens as shown in Figure 4-40, “FileZilla users window”

(p. 4-65). Figure 4-40 FileZilla users window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

With the General page highlighted, click Add on the right pane.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-65 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Add user account screen opens as shown in Figure 4-41, “FileZilla add

user window” (p. 4-66). Figure 4-41 FileZilla add user window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Type a user account name in the top dialog box. Note: The account name is the user id used in “Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software” (p. 4-14). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Select the group created in Step 7 from the list and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Check the Password check-box and type a password in the dialog box. Note: This is the password used in “Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software” (p. 4-14). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Select the group created in Step 7 from the Group Membership list.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-66 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Select the Shared folders page in the left pane and the Users screen changes as shown in Figure 4-42, “FileZilla users shared folders window” (p. 4-67). Figure 4-42 FileZilla users shared folders window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Click Add.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-67 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Stand-alone node set-up

Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A browse window opens as shown in Figure 4-43, “FileZilla browse folder

window” (p. 4-68). Figure 4-43 FileZilla browse folder window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied to, and select it. Then click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23

The folder appears in the directories screen. With the newly added folder selected, ensure that the Read and Write check-boxes are checked. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24

Click Set as home dir. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25

Click OK to close the screen. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 4-68 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

5

Circuit connections 5

Overview Purpose

The procedures in this chapter should be used when adding new wavelength services to an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network. In addition to provisioning the new service, several steps must be followed to ensure that the service reaches the correct operational power levels. Contents Provision new wavelength service

5-2

Perform power adjustments

5-13

Delete wavelength service

5-29

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

5-34

5-min timer during service turn-up

5-41

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

5-46

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision new wavelength service Overview

This procedure provides the steps required to provision a new wavelength service between transponders installed at two end-point nodes. The procedure assumes that the transponders have already been installed and fibered in the nodes, and the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM server is up and connected to the network. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the transponders that have been installed and fibered to carry the wavelength service. Note: When a CFP must be installed, remove the OT circuit pack from the shelf and then replace or insert the CFP. Ensure the CFP is seated securely and seat the OT circuit pack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Right-click on one of the nodes at the wavelength end point and select Provision -> Physical Topology...from the menu. See Figure 5-1, “1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 5-2). Figure 5-1 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

The Physical Topology window will display as shown in Figure 5-2, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window” (p. 5-3). Figure 5-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click the Line (L1) port of the transponder card. •

If a B-end Point connection is displayed at the bottom of the screen and matches how the transponder is physically fibered, skip to Step 7.

•

If a B-end Point is not displayed, the topological link needs to be provisioned. Continue to the next step. Note: Typically the topological link for the transponder will only be present if it was part of the EPT plan.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

With the transponder Line (L1) port still highlighted, select the port where the other end of the fiber is connected (CWR8, CWR8-88, or filter).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: If the other port is on a different shelf, first select the appropriate shelf on the equipment tree on the left. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

With both ports highlighted, click Connect the fiber endpoints as shown in Figure 5-3, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button” (p. 5-4). Figure 5-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Close the Physical Topology window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Repeat Step 2 through Step 7 for the second transponder at the other end point. Enable transponder ports ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double-click one of the nodes at an endpoint of the service.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

The NE inventory window opens similar to that shown in Figure 5-4, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window” (p. 5-5). Figure 5-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click the client port of the transponder card that carries the service.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Right-click on the unassigned client port in the equipment tree and select Assign Port from the menu. See Figure 5-5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu” (p. 5-6). Figure 5-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

An assign port window appears as shown in Figure 5-6, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port” (p. 5-6). Figure 5-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

From the list, select the service type that to be transported and click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Right-click on the assigned client port and select Administration -> Interface Admin Status up as shown in Figure 5-7, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu” (p. 5-7). Figure 5-7 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Close the NE inventory window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Has the second transponder card been provisioned yet? If yes, continue to Step 18. If no, go back to Step 9. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Close the physical topology window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

In the topological view of the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, identify the two NEs at the end-points of the wavelength service on the map. Left-click on the NE and hold the key to select both NEs.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Select Provision -> Provision Wavelength Service from the top menu. See Figure 5-8, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu” (p. 5-8). Figure 5-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

The Provision New Wavelength Service window opens as shown in Figure 5-9, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1” (p. 5-9). Figure 5-9 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Type a service name (any name). Select a layer rate supported by the OTs installed in the two-terminal nodes. The Force XC creation option should be checked if this is a wavelength service used for initial commissioning of the system.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-9 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision the remaining parameters as required by the wavelength service including any protection options. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23

Click Next> to display the port details as shown in Figure 5-10, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2” (p. 5-10). Figure 5-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-10 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24

Select the aid of each transponder for the A-end and Z-end. Then click Next> to display the wavelength service details as shown in Figure 5-11, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 3” (p. 5-11). Figure 5-11 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 3

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-11 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision new wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25

Verify that the provisioning is correct and click Finish to display the service attributes window as shown in Figure 5-12, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 4” (p. 5-12). Figure 5-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26

Select one of the service options and click OK. Result: The wavelength service completion window is displayed as shown in Figure

5-13, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5” (p. 5-12). Figure 5-13 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27

If this is a commissioning service, return to the commissioning procedure. If the service is being added after commissioning, continue to “Perform power adjustments” (p. 5-13). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-12 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform power adjustments Overview

If the path through the network the new service takes crosses lines whose optical power management type is set to Manual, the system will create expected powers and default power deviations at only two key points per line, the ingress line's ingress LD Sig Out port and the egress line's LD Line Out port. The goal of the service turn-up procedure is to modify the light path's power using a combination of add target power setpoint adjustment, LD gain adjustment, and manual pad placement to try to reach the expected powers set up by the system. Note: Lines of FOADM nodes and lines following FOADM lines, services in existence before the new service is added may deviate from their initial target powers. This is normal and the deviation thresholds around the expected power have been calculated to take into account this shift in per channel powers. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Wait for 2 mins for the power to ramp up after creating the service before continuing. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click the Power (A-Z) button on the wavelength service completion window (See Figure 5-13, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5” (p. 5-12))

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-13 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The power management service window opens as shown in Figure 5-14,

“1354 RM-PhM power management service” (p. 5-14). Figure 5-14 1354 RM-PhM power management service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

The power management type is displayed on the top of each power bar in the light path trace. If all the lines are auto power managed, no further adjustment is required. Jump to Step 38. Otherwise continue to Step 4. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Is the egress line of the origination point of the service auto managed? If yes, skip to Step 9. If no, continue to Step 5.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-14 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Adjust the transponder output power level by selecting and dragging the zed bar to the middle of the transponder’s power range (light blue bar) as shown in Figure 5-15, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment” (p. 5-15). Figure 5-15 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-15 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

A warning appears similar to Figure 5-16, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment” (p. 5-16). Click Yes. Figure 5-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Wait for 30 secs and watch the effect on the wavelength egress power level on the NE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Continue to adjust the transponder power level until the wavelength leaves the NE near the middle of the zed bar at the egress point. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Is the next ingress line in the path auto power managed?

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-16 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

If yes, skip to Step 18. If no, continue to Step 10. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Move the mouse over the power bar for the Sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 5-17, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 5-17). Figure 5-17 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this number.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-17 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Right-click on the power bar of the Sig out port and select All Channel Powers as shown in Figure 5-18, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection” (p. 5-18). Figure 5-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-18 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

The power levels for each of the channels with be displayed on a chart as shown in Figure 5-19, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 5-19). Figure 5-19 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-19 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Locate the Power Gain (dB) attribute on the right side of the window as shown in Figure 5-20, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain” (p. 5-20). Add the value calculated in Step 11 to the current value in the field. Figure 5-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Type the new power gain value in the field and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Wait for 30 secs and observe the average channel power levels. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 10 through Step 16. If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to next step.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-20 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Note: Refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74) if there are problems achieving the proper power level. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Is the next egress line in the path auto power managed? If yes, skip to Step 26. If no, continue to Step 19. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

These next steps require someone to be on-site to provide padding. Note: Pad changes should not be required if the channel is directed through the NE using the express ports. Those pads should already be set, and this procedure will only verify the power levels.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-21 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Move the mouse over the power bar for the egress point of the NE. Actual and expected power levels displayed are similar to Figure 5-21, “1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 5-22). Figure 5-21 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Provide the calculated value to the person on-site and pad the path between the ingress and egress lines by the same amount. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23

Wait for 30 secs and observe the power level at the egress point of the NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-22 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24

If the egress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 20 through Step 23 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25

If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to Step 26. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26

Is the next NE in the signal path the Z end containing the transponder? If yes, continue to Step 27. If no, go back to Step 9. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27

Is the ingress line of the Z end NE in the signal path automatically managed? If yes, skip to Step 36. If no, continue to Step 28.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-23 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28

Move the mouse over the power bar for the Sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 5-22, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 5-24). Figure 5-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this number.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-24 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30

Right-click on the power bar of the Sig out port and select All Channel Powers as shown in Figure 5-23, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection” (p. 5-25). Figure 5-23 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-25 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31

The power levels for each of the channels is displayed on a chart as shown in Figure 5-24, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 5-26). Figure 5-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32

Locate the Power Gain (dB) attribute on the right side of the window as shown inFigure 5-25, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain” (p. 5-27).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-26 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Add the value calculated in Step 29 to the current value in the field. Figure 5-25 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33

Type the new power gain value in the field and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34

Wait for 30 secs and observe the average channel power levels. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35

If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 28 through Step 34. If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to Step 36. Note: Refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74) if there are problems achieving the proper power level.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-27 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Perform power adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36

Synchronize the wave key expected powers to the measured powers by clicking the icon as indicated in Figure 5-26, “1354 RM-PhM all channel powers” (p. 5-28). Figure 5-26 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37

If prompted for confirmation, click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38

Click the “Power (Z-A)” button in the wavelength service completion window. Repeat Step 3 through Step 37 in the Z to A direction. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39

If a protection service exists, repeat the power adjustment steps for the protection service. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-28 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Delete wavelength service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete wavelength service Overview

This procedure provides the steps required to delete a wavelength service previously provisioned using Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. This procedure will also remove the topological links for the transponders associated with the wavelength service. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the wavelength serve to be deleted and the transponders at the end-points of the service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the Topology View, select one of the NEs at an end point of the service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select Provision -> Show Wavelength Services from the top menu. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

The Wavelength service list for that NE is displayed similar to Figure 5-27, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning” (p. 5-29). Figure 5-27 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-29 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Delete wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select and highlight the wavelength service to be deleted and click the Delete button. The Delete button is shaped like an X as in Figure 5-28, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM delete button” (p. 5-30). Figure 5-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM delete button

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

A warning message appears as shown in Figure 5-29, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning” (p. 5-30). Figure 5-29 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Yes. The service is now deleted. Delete topological links created for the transponders ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

The following steps are only required if the topological links need to be deleted. If this was a commissioning service, and the links were created for the service, those links should be deleted.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-30 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Delete wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Right-click one of the nodes containing a transponder card at an end point of the deleted service and select Provision -> Physical Topology...from the menu. See Figure 5-30, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 5-31). Figure 5-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-31 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Delete wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

The Provision Topology window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-31, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window” (p. 5-32). Figure 5-31 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click the Line (L1) port of the transponder card.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-32 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Delete wavelength service

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Click the delete topological link button which is located to the right of the Connect button. See Figure 5-32, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button” (p. 5-33). Figure 5-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

A warning message appears as shown in Figure 5-33, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning” (p. 5-33). Click Yes. Figure 5-33 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Close the Physical Topology window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Repeat Step 9 through Step 14 for the second transponder. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

If this was part of a commissioning procedure, return to the relevant procedure. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-33 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element Background

The line interface of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 transponders can be fibered directly to another network element, unmanaged by the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM for transport. For this application, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 transponder provides a signal (without WaveTracker encoding) to the unmanaged network. The transponder itself is installed in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf and is managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 node. This interworking application is sometimes called the “Dangling OT Feature”. A dangling OT, or a group of dangling OTs, are Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 optical transponders which are plugged into an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf and managed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 node. However, the dangling OT line side optical ports (transmit and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD pack in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 NE. Overview

This procedure provides the steps required to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 transponder to transmit to an unmanaged NE. The procedure assumes that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network has been installed and commissioned, and the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM server is up and connected to the network. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Install the transponder in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf that will be connected to the unmanaged NE, if not installed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Fiber the network ports of the transponder to the unmanaged NE. Refer to the user documentation for the unmanaged NE for connection and provisioning information. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double-click the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 node with the transponder installed in Step 1.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-34 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

The NE inventory window opens similar to as shown in Figure 5-34, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window” (p. 5-35). Figure 5-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-35 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Right-click on the client port of the transponder connected to the 1696. Select Assign Port from the menu Figure 5-35, “1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu” (p. 5-36). Figure 5-35 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu

Result: An assign port window appears as shown in Figure 5-36, “Alcatel-Lucent

1354 RM-PhM assign client port” (p. 5-36). Figure 5-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

From the list, select the service type to be transported and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select the Line (L1) port of the same transponder.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-36 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Click the list next to the ITU (Programmed) attribute as shown in Figure 5-37, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel” (p. 5-37). Select the ITU channel to be transported across the unmanaged network. Figure 5-37 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Provision any additional attributes that are required by the unmanaged network element. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Determine the output power expected by the unmanaged network element and type this value into the Programmed Network Output Power field as shown in Figure 5-38, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power” (p. 5-38).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-37 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply. Figure 5-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Wait several seconds and click Refresh. Observe the Present network output power. Continue to click Refresh until the powers are roughly equal. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Close the NE Inventory window.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-38 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, right-click on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf, with the transponder connected to the 1696 ROADM and select Provision -> Physical Topology... from the menu. See Figure 5-39, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu” (p. 5-39). Figure 5-39 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-39 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Provision Topology window is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Right-click on the Line (L1) port of the transponder card connected to the unmanaged NE and select Create Unmanaged External Connection as shown in Figure 5-40, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection” (p. 5-40). Figure 5-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

A warning appears as shown in Figure 5-41, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning” (p. 5-40). Figure 5-41 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-40 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

The Enter external topology window appears as shown in Figure 5-42, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window” (p. 5-41). Enter the IP address of the unmanaged network element followed by the shelf/slot/port of the fiber connection point in the format shown in the window. Figure 5-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Click OK and “External” is displayed next to the L1 port in the topology window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Close the provision topology window. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

5-min timer during service turn-up Overview

A network service created by OS (for example, PhM), is comprised of a number of Photonic Cross-connects on each of the nodes between the service end-points. The following figure shows a service (red line) created from Node A to Node Z through Node C. In regard to this service, the Node A is the “add node”, Node C is the “thru node” and Node Z is the “drop node”.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-41 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

5-min timer during service turn-up

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-43 An example of network service

When a service is created, the related optical channel can be provisioned to be modulated by keys based on proprietary Wavelength Tracker technology, and we call such service is keyed service. Similarly for service without the channel modulated, we call it un-keyed service. The keys are actually the identification for each channel in the optical network. During photonic cross-connect creation, the keys are assigned by the system/network automatically (that is, auto-keyed) or by user manually (that is, manual-keyed). With the assistance of keys, the network can easily support wavelength routes tracking, power management, performance monitoring and fault location and so on. From a power management perspective, the Software Controlled Optical Transmission (SCOT) algorithm can automatically adjust the optical channel power in the network, based on retrieved optical channel power information for keyed service, this is also called auto-power management. During the service creation or deletion, some transmission defects could exist for a while. However, it is not necessary to raise the transient condition during service turn-up. For instance, from optical power management perspective, the channel power ramps towards the goal, there is no need to raise Optical Channel Optical Power Out of Range (OCH OPR), since this is an expected behavior at service turn-up. When the wavelength is being turned up, there is no need to report any OCH layer defects for the service, since we know the wavelength is in a transitory state. The timer length has been chosen to be consistent with the worst case time for power levels to completely settle, when all the lines along the lightpath are auto-power managed. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-42 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

5-min timer during service turn-up

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Turn-up process for auto-power managed and auto-keyed service

When a service is created by the OS (PhM), then the photonic cross-connections are also created along the path including add node, drop node and thru node (if present). Upon the creation of photonic cross-connection, the Optical Channel Payload Defect Indication (OCH PDI) condition is immediately raised on add node (at the point of Wavelength key encoder, for example, SVAC or OT line port). Upon the creation of the photonic cross-connection, the Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication (OCH FDI) condition is immediately raised on the through and drop nodes at the node ingress point (ingress OA port). While OCH PDI or OCH FDI is raised, other OCH conditions are masked (for example, OCH OPR, OCH LOS, and so on) on the node along the path of the channel. Note that OCH PDI and OCH FDI are not reported conditions, meaning that they are not issued off node to an NMS or alarm monitoring system; they are used only to suppress the reporting of other conditions by degrading their severity to not reported. For example, at the drop node the OT line port may see LOS-P during turn-up (normally critical service affecting), and this is degraded to not reported. Figure 5-44 An example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and auto-keyed service

The add node will send information indicating whether or not the channel for the photonic cross-connection at the add node is leaving the node with appropriate power. Initially when the add photonic cross-connection is created the node advertises that the channel is not at appropriate power. The Software Controlled Optical Transmission (SCOT) algorithm on add node will ramp the optical channel power towards the target power at the node egress. When the egress target power is reached within a defined tolerance, the node emits a Link State Advertisement (LSA, distribute key information) informing downstream nodes that it is .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-43 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

5-min timer during service turn-up

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

launching power and starts a 5-minute timer to clear its OCH PDI. When downstream nodes (thru node and drop node) receive the LSA, they also begin 5-minute timers to clear their own OCH FDI condition. When the timers expire, the PDI/FDI conditions are lowered, and any other OCH-related conditions will be visible if present, for example the LOS-P condition at the OT line port at drop node will be reported with original severity of “Critical”. Note: •

The timer period is 10-minute in the case the node is designed and deployed in a long haul optical transmission context.

•

The PSS32/16 DWDM application always requires OA at the NE boundary. If the ingress OA is not provisioned, then there will be no place to report OCH FDI. However, the user would still be able to see “OCH FDI” information in Photonic cross-connection secondary state. Above example Figure 5-44, “An example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and auto-keyed service” (p. 5-43) is only for A-to-Z direction. A bi-directional service will have similar conditions/processes raised/ongoing in the other direction.

•

Turn-up process for auto-power managed and manual-keyed service

For auto-power managed and manual-keyed service, the service turn-up process is similar to the auto-power managed and auto-keyed case. The difference is that for the auto-power managed and auto-keyed case, the 5-minute timer is started once the thru node and drop node receives the LSA message carrying key info emitted from add node, while for auto-power managed and manual-keyed service the 5-minute timer is started once the local Photonic cross-connection is provisioned (during this process the keys for ingress direction and egress direction are manually assigned by user). This is actually the difference between auto-keyed and manual-keyed cases, irrelevant of auto-power managed or manual-power managed. For manual-power managed and keyed service, irrespective of auto-keyed or manual-keyed, the system/network will not automatically adjust the optical power. The user needs to set the power/attenuation/gain manually along the service path. This includes the OT line port, MVAC/SVAC, fast eVOA, CWR, OA and so on. The 5-minute timer is supported for this case. However, since this procedure may take longer than 5-minutes blackout period, it is possible that alarms (LOS-P severity transitions from Not Reported to Critical) will be seen during manual power adjustment. One exceptional behavior of manual-keyed case compared with auto-keyed case, irrespective of auto-power managed or manual-power managed, is that the OCH FDI or OCH PDI condition will not be raised. Therefore, it is invisible to user, although the minute timer to suppress OT alarm (for example, LOS-P reported as Not Reported) is still supported.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-44 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

5-min timer during service turn-up

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

For manual-power managed and unkeyed service, there is no OCH FDI or OCH PDI suppression mechanism or 5-minutes timer, therefore the OT alarm will be normally reported (for example, LOS-P reported with severity as Critical). Above behaviors are normal for Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) being ready. Although Generic Communication Channel (GCC) is also able to distribute the LSA message carrying key info, the SCOT auto-power management is only supported when OSC channel is ready. In case of both OSC and GCC not ready, there is no channel to communicate LSA in the network. For this case, the photonic cross-connects must be created as manually keyed. When a manually keyed connection is created (whether auto-power managed or manual-power managed), the OCH FDI and OCH PDI countdown timers begin immediately after photonic cross-connect creation. As described above, OCH layer conditions will be degraded to not reported until the timer expires, after which they will be reported with their normal severity. If though wrong provisioning, some of the photonic cross-connects were created as auto keyed when there is no OSC or GCC ready to communicate LSAs in the network, then the nodes would raise OCH FDI or OCH PDI as normal. The add node could clear its OCH PDI since the information of power achieved is local, and it can begin its countdown timer. However, through or drop node cross-connects would not receive the LSA for power achieved from the add node; therefore the cross-connects would remain in OCH FDI and would cause the other OCH layer defects to be not reported. This case of wrong provisioning.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-45 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link Before you begin

The following procedure is an example for configuring the keyed services on the 1830 PSS-4 Regen link. 11DPE12 circuit pack is used to carry the service passing the bus link from end to end. •

Go direction: CVLAN ID=101, SVLAN ID=201, DWDM frequency = 9130

•

Return direction: CVLAN ID=102, SVLAN ID=202, DWDM frequency = 9130

Figure 5-45 1830 PSS-4 Regen bus link

Procedure for terminal configuration

This section describes the procedure for terminal configuration. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, select the 11DPE12 card from the equipment tree Result: The Card Properties screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

For both the terminals, provision the GbE on C1, OTU2 on L1 and OCH on VA1 ports. Refer to the port provisioning procedure section in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide for the detailed procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Create VTS for C1 and L1 for both the terminals. Reference: Refer “Provision VTS” (p. 5-51) for the detailed procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Create EVPL connection for both the terminals.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-46 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference: Refer Create EVPL fullrate in User Provisioning Guide for the detailed

procedure for EVPL in fullrate mode and Create EVPL Subrate and Q-in-Q in User Provisioning Guide for Subrate and Q-in-Q modes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Complete the physical connection as shown in the following Figure, where L1->VA1-->9310, OMDSig line external, Loopback - DCM.

Reference: Refer to Provision Physical topology in User Provisioning Guide for the

detailed procedure. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure for ILA configuration

This section describes the procedure for ILA configuration. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-47 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, select the OA card AHPHG from the equipment tree. Result: The Card Properties screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Provision the AHPHG card ports. Refer to the Port Provisioning procedures section in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide for the detailed procedure.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-48 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Complete the physical connection as shown in the following figure, where 1/7/Sig 1/8/Sig, 1/7/Line external, Loopback DCM. Refer to Provision Physical topology in User Provisioning Guide for the detailed procedure.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-49 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure for Cross-connection

This section describes the procedure for Cross-connection. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Create OCH Cross-connections on both the terminals. Refer to Provision Cross-connections in User Provisioning Guide for detailed procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The cross-connection in an ILA configuration is as shown in the following figure.

E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-50 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision VTS

This section describes the procedure to create Virtual time-slot map on L1 or client port (C1-C21). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

In the WebUI, from the equipment tree, select the 11DPE12 card and the L1 port. Note: For creating VTS on client port, select the Client port (C1-C21). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click on the VTS port. Result: The Create Virtual Time Slot Map screen is displayed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the timeslot from the VTS: list ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the direction from the Direction: list. The options available are Egress, Ingress and Ingress and Egress. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Select the relevant classification mode. The options available are CE-VLAN Tagged, SE-VLAN Tagged and Untagged. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Enter a CE-VLAN ID. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Submit to update the changes. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Procedure for Add-drop Service

This section describes the procedure to add/drop service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Add CVLAN ID=101/102 from tester on go/return direction. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Adjust the optical power at every end. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Complete the fiber connection.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-51 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Circuit connections

Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Drop the CVLAN ID=101/102 to the tester. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 5-52 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

6

S6ystem Turn-up and commissioning

Overview Purpose

This chapter provides the detailed procedures required to commission the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager (1354 RM-PhM) along with the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool. Contents Network commissioning background

6-2

Preconditioning procedure

6-5

Establish connection to the network

6-7

Provision the system

6-14

Commission a FOADM system

6-23

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

6-42

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

6-53

Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier

6-58

Disconnect PC from the Network

6-59

Understanding the loss report

6-60

Generate and review system loss report

6-67

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

6-74

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Network commissioning background

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network commissioning background Network planning overview

The first stage before deploying the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is network planning using the Engineering Planning Tool (EPT). Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide for the procedures used to plan the network. During the planning stage the equipment required to meet the demands of the network is defined. The network can be planned to support demands in the future that are not required in the first phase of deployment. A network is comprised of one or more systems planned in the EPT. Generally the nodes and fiber spans between nodes will comprise a linear or ring topology for each system. In a static OADM system, an obvious ring or linear topology may not be apparent; in this case the topology is referred to as a mesh topology. When the network is planned and validated the EPT will produce separate commissioning files for each of the systems that comprise the network (see the following). These files are used by the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool when commissioning the systems. For more details on the commissioning file format and contents, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide. Decomposing networks into constituent systems

The EPT segments networks into systems. The CPB tool is designed to operate on one system at a time. Terminal points in the network and colorless add/drop ports of CWR8 or CWR8-88 cards demarcate one system from another. Figure 6-1, “Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems” (p. 6-3) illustrates a mesh network. System (1) is a TOADM ring system, system (2) is a TOADM linear system, system (3) is a TOADM linear system and systems (4), (5) and (6) are linear FOADM systems. Notice that systems (4), (5) and (6) are separate FOADM systems due to the fact there is no express path between them, and they are joined at a multi-degree FOADM NE using loop connections (channel routing). Also notice that some lines can be auto power managed and other lines must be manually power managed. All lines connected intranode to create a FOADM node with line count higher than two must be manually power managed. The topology and the power management settings of the lines that make up the topology of a system determine the level of support provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM and CPB for maintaining optical power levels, upgrading equipment and commissioning each system. The EPT will produce a commissioning file in .xml format that can be used by the CPB tool to commission the systems. The content of the file will depend on the type of equipment found on each line of a system.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Network commissioning background

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-1 Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems

Use of the CPB tool

The CPB tool can be used in conjunction with Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM or can also be installed and used as a stand-alone tool. The Provisioning, Commissioning, and Power Balancing menus and respective functionality of the CPB tool integrated in Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM and the stand-alone CPB are the same. However, the stand-alone CPB tool requires the user to have access to another Network Management System (for example, OMS, INC, and so on) or utilize the NE built in user interfaces

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Network commissioning background

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

(CLI or WebUI) to make the relevant adjustments required in support of Provisioning, Commissioning, and Power Balancing the Network Element that would have otherwise been performed by utilizing the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Keyed versus unkeyed OCh

There are two distinct types of optical cross-connections, or OCh, that are supported by the system. These are: •

•

Keyed OCh: The optical channel is Wavelength Tracker (WT) encoded with Wave Keys, and can be decoded at WT decode points throughout the network. WT decoders can raise WT-related alarms for keyed OCh, and will show per channel power levels. Keyed OCh can be supported on TOADM or FOADM network elements. Keyed OCh can be transported on lines whose power management settings are Auto or Manual. Unkeyed OCh: The optical channel is not Wavelength Tracker encoded with Wave Keys. At WT decoder locations no per channel power levels are reported for unkeyed OCh, and WT-related alarms are not raised. Unkeyed OCh are only supported on FOADM network elements. Unkeyed OCh can only be transported on lines whose power management settings are Manual.

Keyed and unkeyed OCh are not permitted to be mixed on the same network element. Network designs must be keyed or unkeyed. Note: Due to the restriction that unkeyed OCh cannot be transported on Auto SCOT lines, all NE optical lines in the network must be set to SCOT type Manual.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Preconditioning procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Preconditioning procedure Purpose

Use this procedure to ensure that the network and PC is ready for Greenfield commissioning. This procedure should be completed on all constituent systems as described in “Decomposing networks into constituent systems” (p. 6-2) and all network elements that will be commissioned. Background

The procedures in the following sections relate to commissioning of a Greenfield system. A Greenfield system is one that has never been commissioned previously and does not carry services. These procedures can also be used if all services are removed from a system to recommission a system. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for information on maintaining existing systems. The procedures in this chapter assume that the customer data communications network has not been established yet. Therefore, the procedures have been written assuming that the integration will be completed using a PC directly connected to one of the network elements in the system to be commissioned. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Ensure that all the procedures in Ensure that all the procedures in Equipment installation have been completed on all network elements in the network to be commissioned.have been completed on all network elements in the network to be commissioned. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Ensure that all the outside plant fibers have been properly connected to the correct line driver cards on each network element and any necessary Fiber Optic Characterization is completed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

The paths of the commissioning services must be predetermined as described in “Commission a FOADM system” (p. 6-23) for each FOADM system. Ensure that there are OT cards installed and fibered in the locations determined by those commissioning services. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If there are spans with external Raman amplification, a commissioning service must be established to pass through the Raman amplifiers. If the commissioning services determined in the previous steps do not pass through all Raman amplifiers, install and

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Preconditioning procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

fiber additional OTs to provide commissioning services to pass through the missed Raman amplifiers. The channel should be as close to the middle of the channel plan as possible (near 194.00 THz). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

For each FOADM system to be commissioned, field personnel must be physically present with attenuation pads at add/drop nodes. If the system is supporting unkeyed OCh, the field personnel should also have a power meter and a wavelength meter or OSA. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Obtain the loopback IP addresses of all the NE’s in the network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Obtain all the xml commissioning files produced by EPT for each system to be commissioned and copy them onto the PC that will be used for commissioning. Important! Ensure that the latest commissioning files are used with the most accurate fiber data. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Ensure that both the client and server Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM software (or relevant software if another management system is to be used with stand-alone CPB) as well as the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool has been installed on the PC. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for detailed procedures on installing and configuring the software. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Continue to “Establish connection to the network” (p. 6-7) to start PhM and discover all the nodes. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Establish connection to the network Purpose

This procedure will establish connection to the network and discover all the network elements. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for additional information on configuring the server and client as well as discovering network elements. Note: If another management system will be used, refer to the documentation for that system for discovering the NEs. The procedures in this chapter reference Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, but the procedures can be performed with another management system along with stand-alone CPB. Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of all the NEs

As noted earlier, these procedures are performed with a PC connected to one of the network elements in the network. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the active EC card on the NE that will act as the local connection point and the other end to the Ethernet port on your PC. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Open a PC command shell and type ipconfig and . The NE CIT address is the “Default Gateway”. Record this CIT address because it will be changed, and this address will be needed later. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Telnet to the CIT address and login to CLI. Refer to “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12) for more information. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type show interface ec 1/1/cit and . Sample output is as shown in the following: IP Address : 172.16.0.1/24MAC Address : 00:60:1D:7C:56:D0 Admin State : Up Up Redistribute : Disabled Disabled DHCP : Enabled 1 Conf. Speed : Auto Auto

L1/L2 Oper State

:

Proxy Arp

:

DHCP_range

:

Conf. Duplex Mode

:

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Actual Speed Duplex

: 100.000000 Mbps

Actual Duplex Mode : Full

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Type: config interface ec 1/1/cit ip 172.16.2.1/24 and . The purpose of this step is to change the CIT IP address to a unique subnet within the entire DCN. Sample output is as shown in the following: WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result in a loss of IP connectivity to this network element from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity will not be affected.

Enter Yes to confirm and no to cancel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Type: Yes and . Result: Communication to the NE will be lost. Close the telnet session. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Return to the Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Type: ipconfig /renew and Result: This forces the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE through DHCP. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Telnet to the new CIT address and once again log in to the NE through the CLI. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

From the CLI, type: config int ec 1/1/cit red enable and . Result: This turns on route distribution for the CIT port. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Start PhM and discover NEs ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Start the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM application on your PC.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The 1354 RM-PhM EMS Login window appears as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-2 1354 RM-PhM login screen

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Click Change Server/Port. Result: The Enter new server/port window appears as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-3 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter the IP address of your PC in the Server: field and do not change the Port: field. Then click OK. Result: This takes you back to the login screen. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Enter your User name and Password. Then click OK. Note: If this is your first time logging in, the User name is admin and Password is tropxnms. You will then be required to change the password.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-9 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If this is the first login, you are required to change the password. Enter the new password twice and click OK. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for information on the password requirements. Figure 6-4 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

The Management Control Panel: Topology View window appears as shown in Figure 6-5, “1354 RM-PhM topology view screen” (p. 6-10). Figure 6-5 1354 RM-PhM topology view screen

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-10 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

From the top menu, select Maintenance > Auto Discovery. Result: The Auto-Discovery Settings window opens as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-6 1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Select Auto Discovery by IP and click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Select File -> New NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-11 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Create Network Element window appear as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-7 1354 RM-PhM create network element

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Enter the CIT IP address of the NE directly connected to the PC in the NE IP address field. Then click Create. Note: This is the address provisioned in “Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of all the NEs” (p. 6-7).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-12 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Establish connection to the network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The messages at the bottom of the window will indicate if the NE was

successfully created. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

The NE appears in the group view as a white box until it is discovered. When it is discovered, the NE name will be displayed, and the color changes to represent the highest level alarm on the NE. See the following figure. Figure 6-8 1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NE’s

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Additional network elements starts appearing in the map view. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

After the auto discovery is complete, check the NEs that were discovered against the list of NEs in the network. If there are any NEs missing, repeat Step 9 through Step 11 for any network elements that were not auto discovered. However, this time the NE loopback address should be used rather than the CIT IP address. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Continue to “Provision the system” (p. 6-14) to begin provisioning all of the network elements. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-13 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision the system Purpose

This procedure will provision the cards and topological links for all the NEs in each system of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network using the EPT commissioning file(s) as input to the CPB tool provisioning wizard. The CPB tool is accessed from Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Important! This procedure is to be repeated for each EPT commissioning file generated for the network. Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify all the network elements in the system have been correctly discovered by the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Refer to “Establish connection to the network” (p. 6-7) and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

From the top menu select Provision -> Launch CPB...

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-14 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: An Internet Explorer window opens with the CPB tool login screen as shown

in the following figure. Figure 6-9 CPB login window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM user name and password and click Login.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-15 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The CPB main window opens as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-10 CPB main window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select Commissioning -> Provision System (using plan)... from the top menu.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-16 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Provision System Wizard: Overview window is displayed as shown in

the following figure. Figure 6-11 CPB provision system wizard overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click Next>.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-17 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Provisioning options and wizard options window is displayed as shown

in the following figure. Figure 6-12 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select all the check boxes and click Next>.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-18 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Select Planning Tool Output File window is displayed as shown in the

following figure. Figure 6-13 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click Browse and browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the system to be commissioned, select the file, and click Open. Then click Next>.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-19 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The provision system node list window is displayed as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

All the nodes can be selected for provisioning by clicking >>. A node may be excluded from provisioning by selecting it in the right half of the window and clicking the .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-20 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Provisioning Stages window is displayed as shown in the following

figure. Figure 6-15 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Review the error report and troubleshoot any problems encountered. Refer to the site documentation and check for discrepancies between what is expected and what is installed. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

When all steps show Completed, click Finish.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-21 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Provision the system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: This takes you back to the CPB tool main window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Are there additional systems (that is, commissioning files) that have not been provisioned? If yes, go to Step 1. If no, continue to next step. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

The systems are now ready for commissioning. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-22 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commission a FOADM system Background

A FOADM system may be a ring, linear, or mesh system. The lines on FOADM nodes with degree 2 or greater are manually power managed. Because of this, OTs must be installed and wavelength services provisioned to complete commissioning on a FOADM system. The following requirements must be met regarding the wavelength/commissioning services: 1. A commissioning service must cross an express path that will be used in the system at least once during commissioning to allow the calculation and placement of attenuating pads (if necessary) in FOADM nodes. 2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD. 3. A commissioning service must cross every line in the system that is Automatically optical power managed at least once during commissioning to allow the user to trigger the ingress and egress adjustment functions. The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been predetermined during network planning. If there are no predetermined routes, the user should determine which paths have not been commissioned and create services over one those paths following the guidelines above. (Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to minimize the number of transponder deployments or redeployments necessary during the commissioning phase). When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it is always best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F of the SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose the channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest the center of the frequency band. Figure 6-16, “Commissioning service for a FOADM system” (p. 6-24) shows a FOADM linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the terminal NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B, C, or G of the five-channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned channel add/drop at each network element. In that case two services will be required that overlap at least one of the FOADM node express paths.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-23 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-16 Commissioning service for a FOADM system

Procedure

The following is the procedure to Commission a FOADM system: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Ensure that field personnel are present as stated in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 6-5). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard has been run and that the nodes that make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated in “Provision the system” (p. 6-14). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Ensure that the transponder cards are installed as described in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 6-5). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Identify the wavelength service to be created.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-24 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created. Determine the service type that will be provisioned between the transponders. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Follow the procedure, “Provision new wavelength service” (p. 5-2), to provision the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Wait for 2 mins after the service creation for the power to ramp up before continuing. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

If the wavelength service provisioning completion window is still open as shown in Figure 6-17, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion” (p. 6-25), skip to Step 11 . Otherwise continue to the next step. Figure 6-17 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Select one of the nodes at an end point of the commissioning service and select View -> Show Wavelength Services from the menu on top.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-25 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Wavelength Services window will open similar to the one shown in

Figure 6-18, “1354 RM-PhM wavelength services” (p. 6-26). Figure 6-18 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Select and highlight the commissioning service in the list. The Power (A-Z) button appears at the top of the window as shown in the following figure. Use this button for the next step. Figure 6-19 1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click Power (A-Z).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-26 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The Power Management: service window opens as shown in Figure 6-20,

“1354 RM-PhM power adjust” (p. 6-27). Figure 6-20 1354 RM-PhM power adjust

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

The Power Management window displays the power levels along the A to Z path of the provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at all the egress and ingress lines. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Check the Auto Refresh check box so that the effect of the power adjustments can be viewed immediately. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Is the first NE in the signal path (A-end) automatically managed? If yes, continue to Step 15 If no, skip to Step 18.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-27 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Under Power Control (Egress), select aid of the egress point of the A-end of the signal path from the list and click the Execute. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Figure 6-21 1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message

Verify the Result field shows Success. The egress power levels at the A-end must be green and within the zed bar. Note: It is possible that on a new system the adjustment could fail the first time. If this happens, attempt the adjustment again after waiting 30 secs. If the adjustment fails again follow the troubleshooting steps provided in “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74). This is also true for the remaining power adjustments. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete. Go to Step 23 .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-28 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Adjust the transponder output power level by selecting and dragging the zed bar to the middle of the transponder’s power range (light blue bar) as shown in Figure 6-22, “1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment” (p. 6-29) Figure 6-22 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-29 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

A warning appears similar to Figure 6-23, “1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment” (p. 6-30). Click Yes. Figure 6-23 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Wait for 30 secs and watch the effect on the wavelength egress power level on the NE. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Continue to adjust the transponder power level until the wavelength leaves the NE near the middle of the zed bar at the egress point. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-30 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23

Is the ingress line of the next NE in the signal path automatically managed? If yes, continue to Step 24 If no, skip to Step 27 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24

Under Power Control (Ingress), select aid of the ingress point of the NE from the list and click Execute. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25

After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify the Result field shows Success. The ingress power levels at the NE should be green and within the zed bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26

Power adjustment on the ingress line of the NE is complete. Go to Step 35.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-31 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27

Move the mouse over the power bar for the ingress point power levels will display similar to Figure 6-24, “1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 6-32). Figure 6-24 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this number.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-32 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29

Right-click on the power bar at the ingress point and select Edit Amp from the power adjust menu as shown in Figure 6-25, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu” (p. 6-33). Figure 6-25 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-33 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30

The Facility/Connection window appears as shown in Figure 6-26, “1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window” (p. 6-34). Figure 6-26 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31

Select Power Gain (dB) and add the value calculated in Step 28 to the current value in the field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32

Type the new power gain value in the field and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33

Wait for 30 secs and go back to the Power Management window. Observe the power level at the ingress point of the NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-34 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34

If the ingress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 27 through Step 32. If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to Step 35. Note: Refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74), if there are problems achieving the proper power level. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35

Move to the egress line of the same NE; is that automatically managed? If yes, continue to Step 36 If no, skip to Step 39 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36

Under Power Control (Egress), select aid of the egress point of the NE from the list and click Execute. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37

After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify that the Result field shows Success. The egress power level must be Green and within the zed bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38

Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete. Go to Step 45. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39

These next steps require someone to be on-site to provide padding.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-35 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40

Move the mouse over the power bar for the egress point of the NE. Actual and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 6-24, “1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 6-32). Figure 6-27 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42

Provide the calculated value to the person on-site and pad the path between the ingress and egress lines by the same amount. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43

Wait for 30 secs and observe the power level at the egress point of the NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-36 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44

If the egress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 40 through Step 43 . If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to Step 45. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45

Is the next NE in the signal path the Z end containing the transponder? If yes, continue to Step 46. If no, go back to Step 23. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46

Is the ingress line of the Z end NE in the signal path automatically managed? If yes, continue to Step 47. If no, skip to Step 50. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47

Under Power Control (Ingress), select aid of the ingress point of the Z end NE from the list and click Execute. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48

After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify that the Result field shows Success. The ingress power levels at the NE should be green and within the zed bar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49

Power adjustment on the ingress line of the NE is complete. Go to Step 58.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-37 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50

Move the mouse over the power bar for the ingress point of the NE. Actual and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 6-24, “1354 RM-PhM power level reading” (p. 6-32). Figure 6-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51

Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this number.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-38 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52

Right-click on the power bar at the ingress point and select Edit Amp from the power adjust menu as shown in Figure 6-25, “1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu” (p. 6-33). Figure 6-29 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-39 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53

The Facility/Connection window appears as shown in Figure 6-26, “1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window” (p. 6-34). Figure 6-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

54

Select the Power Gain (dB) field and add the value calculated in Step 51 to the current value in the field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

55

Type the new power gain value in the field and click Apply. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

56

Wait for 30 secs and go back to the Power Management window. Observe the power level at the ingress point of the NE.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-40 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

57

If the ingress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 50 through Step 56. If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is complete. Continue to Step 58. Note: Refer to “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74), if there are problems achieving the proper power level. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

58

Close the Power management window and go back to the wavelength service completion window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

59

Click Power (Z-A) button in the wavelength service completion window. Repeat Step 12 through Step 58 in the Z to A direction. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

60

Close the wavelength service window. Power adjustments have been completed for the lines covered by that wavelength service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

61

Go to “Delete wavelength service” (p. 5-29) to delete the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

62

Are there any additional wavelength services that are needed to complete commissioning on the system? If yes, go back to Step 4. If no, continue to Step 63. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

63

Commissioning on the FOADM system is now complete. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-41 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines Background

Refer to “Keyed versus unkeyed OCh” (p. 6-4) for more information about unkeyed networks. Note that the EPT design will explicitly state that the network design is unkeyed. An unkeyed system must be commissioned using wavelength (or commissioning) services using the following guidelines. 1. A commissioning service must cross an express path that will be used in the system at least once during commissioning to allow the calculation and placement of attenuating pads (if necessary) in FOADM nodes. 2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD. 3. A commissioning service must be added at every FOADM-1 (terminal) egress line in the system at least once during commissioning to verify that the equipment is installed correctly. The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been pre-determined during network planning. If there are no pre-determined routes then the user must determine which paths have not been commissioned yet and create a service over one of those paths. Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to minimize the number of transponder deployments or redeployments necessary during the commissioning phase. When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it is best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F of the SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose the channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest to the center of the frequency band. Figure 6-16, “Commissioning service for a FOADM system” (p. 6-24) shows a FOADM linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the terminal NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B, C, or G of the five-channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned channel add/drop at each network element. In this case two services will be required that overlap at least one of the FOADM node express paths.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-42 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 6-31 Commissioning service for a FOADM system

Procedure

The following is the procedure to Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines: Important! When following this procedure, note that the ALPFGT has a small gain setting range in which the gain profile across the C-band is flat. Therefore, Alcatel-Lucent strongly recommends operating the ALPFGT LD within the Gmin to Gmax parameters from the EPT. If the gain setting required to eliminate the power error calculated in the procedure would be outside the gain range it is better to accept the power error and set the gain setting to the nearest boundary of the gain range (Gmin or Gmax). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Ensure that they are present as stated in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 6-5). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard available in CPB has been run and that the nodes that make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated in “Provision the system” (p. 6-14).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-43 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Ensure that the transponder cards are installed as described and stated in the “Preconditioning procedure” (p. 6-5). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Identify the wavelength service to be created. Refer to the detailed description in “Background” (p. 6-42). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created (refer to “Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines” (p. 6-42) for commissioning service guidelines). Determine the service type that will be provisioned between the transponders. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Follow the procedure, “Provision new wavelength service” (p. 5-2), to provision the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Wait for 2 mins after the service creation for the power to ramp up before continuing. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Determine the first node in the light path and double-click the node in the Topology View to open the NE Inventory window.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-44 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service and note the value of “Per channel target output power (dBm)”. See example in Figure 6-32, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power” (p. 6-45). Figure 6-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-45 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Click the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change the Programmed Network Output Power to the value noted in Step 9. See Figure 6-33, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power” (p. 6-46) Figure 6-33 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

If a wavelength meter or OSA is available on-site, continue to Step 12. If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 17 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Connect a power meter to the Tx Mon port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the Total Network Power Egress and the power measured by the power meter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Remove the power meter and connect the wavelength meter or OSA to the monitor port. Observe the channel power on the wavelength meter or OSA for the commissioning service. Add the delta previously calculated.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-46 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Make adjustments to the transponder Programmed Network Output Power, see Step 10 until the observed channel power plus the delta equals the Per channel target output power as noted in Step 9. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Jump to Step 23. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Select Wavelength Tracker -> View Services from the NE Inventory top menu. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

The wavelength services list will appear similar to Figure 6-34, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list” (p. 6-47). Count the number services present on the Line port. Figure 6-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 18 and the Per channel target output power as noted in Step 9 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Click Close. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21

Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power Step 10 until the Total Network Power Egress of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in Step 19. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-47 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22

Note the final Total Network Power Egress (Ptarget upstream) and Per channel target output power (Ptarget upstream). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23

Determine the next node in the light path and double-click it to open the NE inventory window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24

If there is an ingress amplifier at the next node, continue to Step 25 . If there is no ingress amplifier, jump to Step 29 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25

Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Note the Per channel target output power (Ptargetdownstream) and the “Signal Power Egress” (Poutdownstream). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26

Calculate the amount to adjust the ingress amplifier gain setting using the following formula. Delta = (Ptargetdownstream-Ptargetupstream)- and (Poutdownstream-Poutupstream). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27

Change the Power Gain attribute by the delta value calculated in Step 26. See example in Figure 6-35, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment” (p. 6-48). Figure 6-35 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-48 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28

Obtain new values for Poutdownstream and Poutupstream and recalculate the delta value using the formula in Step 26. If the absolute delta value is greater than 0.5 dB wait five secs, and then change the power gain value again. Continue the iterations until the delta is less than 0.5 dB waiting five secs between changes. Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of Maximum Gain and Minimum Gain there is likely to be an upstream loss problem that must be identified and corrected. Possible reasons for the problem could be one of the following. •

The Poutupstream reading changed due to a disruption at the upstream NE.

•

Failure to place an input fixed attenuating pad after a short span. Check the EPT design.

• •

The upstream span loss is too high or too low. The patch panel connection loss between the fiber span and Line In port of the receiving network element is too high.

•

For topologies where the receive direction amplification is provided by an ALPFGT pack, the loss between the receiving network element Line In port and the ALPFGT Sig In port may be too high.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29

Determine the egress line of the light path and select the Line port of the egress amplifier. Note the Total Network Power Egress and the Per channel target output power. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30

If a wavelength meter or OSA is available on-site, continue to Step 31. If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 37. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31

Connect a power meter to the Tx Mon port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32

Determine the delta between the Total Network Power Egress and the power measured by the power meter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33

Remove the power meter and connect the wavelength meter or OSA to the monitor port. Observe the channel power on the wavelength meter or OSA for the commissioning service. Add the delta calculated Step 32 .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-49 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34

Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the channel power determined in Step 33 and the Per channel target output power. Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected through the loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the channel ports. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35

Make attenuation changes until the measured channel power is within 1 dB of the Per channel target output power. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36

If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46. If the target power cannot be achieved jump to Step 44. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Select Wavelength Tracker -> View Services from the NE Inventory top menu. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38

The wavelength services list will appear similar to Figure 6-34, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list” (p. 6-47). Count the number of services present on the Line port. Figure 6-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39

Calculate the expected total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 38 and the Per channel target output power.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-50 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40

Click Close. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41

Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the expected total power calculated in Step 39 and the Total Network Power Egress. Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected through the loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the channel ports. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42

Make attenuation changes until the Total Network Power Egress is within 1 dB of the expected total power. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43

If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46. If the target power cannot be achieved continue to Step 44. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44

If changing fixed attenuators in the ingress to egress line path cannot achieve the Line Out target power, consider increasing the egress amplifier gain setting if one is present. Note: The following step must only be taken if all other possibilities are exhausted. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45

Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Change the Power Gain attribute by the required amount. Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of Maximum Gain and Minimum Gain there is likely a loss problem within the node that must be identified and corrected. (Verify the Poutupstream reading has not changed as well). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46

Repeat Step 22 through Step 43 for each node before terminating node of the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47

Repeat Step 22 through Step 28 for the terminating node. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48

Repeat Step 8 through Step 43 for the opposite direction of the light path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-51 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49

Go to “Delete wavelength service” (p. 5-29) to delete the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50

Are there additional wavelength services that are needed to complete commissioning on the system? If yes, go back to Step 4. If no, continue to Step 52. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51

There is an optional procedure to prepare the system for additional services. For more information and detailed procedure, go to “Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services” (p. 6-53). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52

Commissioning on the FOADM system is now complete. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-52 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services Background

After completing the procedure“Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines” (p. 6-42), through path of the system has been commissioned. This is sufficient to set the gain settings of the amplifiers in the system and determine the value of any fixed attenuators required on through transmission path. Every service addition at a FOADM node in an unkeyed network would require a remeasurement of the output power using an OSA or wavelength meter to determine the correct add path power to reach the egress Line Out target power. An optional additional step in commissioning is to determine the required add path power from each SFD filter to achieve the Line Out target power. The values determined cannot be stored in the network element, however the operator may wish to record the values for reference so that when additional services are added using the SFDs already installed, the required target power for the add path can be set directly. Transponders are fibered to the SFDs that require the target power. Wavelength services will be created across the SFDs to determine the values. Procedure

The following is the procedure to prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Determine the transponder fibered to the SFD for the degree of interest. Create a wavelength service terminated at that transponder using the procedure “Provision new wavelength service” (p. 5-2). Note: Use a channel from the middle of the channel set supported by the filter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Double-click the add node for the wavelength service to open the NE inventory window.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-53 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select the Line port of the egress amplifier for the wavelength service and note the Per channel target output power. See Figure 6-32, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power” (p. 6-45). Figure 6-37 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-54 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Click the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change the Programmed Network Output Power to the value noted in Step 3. See Figure Figure 6-33, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power” (p. 6-46). Figure 6-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If a wavelength meter or OSA is available on-site, continue to Step 6. If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 11 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Connect a power meter to the Tx Mon port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the Total Network Power Egress and the power measured by the power meter. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Remove the power meter and connect the wavelength meter or OSA to the monitor port. Observe the channel power on the wavelength meter or OSA for the commissioning service. Add the delta previously calculated.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-55 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power (see Step 4) until the observed channel power plus the delta equals the Per channel target output power as noted in Step 3. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

Jump to Step 16. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Select Wavelength Tracker -> View Services from the NE Inventory top menu. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

The wavelength services list will appear similar to Figure 6-34, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list” (p. 6-47). Count the number services present on the Line port. Figure 6-39 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 12 and the Per channel target output power as noted in Step 3. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Click Close. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power (see Step 4) until the Total Network Power Egress of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in Step 13. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-56 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

Once the power setting required at the transponder Line port has been determined, record this value for future use as the nominal reference power for this SFD to external Line Out combination. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17

Delete the wavelength service created following the procedure “Delete wavelength service” (p. 5-29). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

Repeat Step 1 through Step 17 for each SFD to Line Out combination on the FOADM degree being tested. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19

Repeat Step 1 through Step 18 for other degrees in the system being commissioned. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20

Commissioning on the FOADM system is now complete. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-57 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier Overview

The opposite direction port parameter will define the association between two unidirectional ports. So a Bidirectional cross-connection can be used with different unidirectional topology connections. The following are the unidirectional LD packs: •

AM2125A - LINEIN, LINEOUT

• •

AM2125B - LINEIN, LINEOUT AM2318A - LINEIN, LINEOUT Note: The opposite direction port parameter can only be provisioned on ports that have an external topology connection. If the port is not externally connected, then the NE software denies any attempt to provision the associated port.

Steps to provision/delete opposite direction port ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

The opposite direction port parameter for each direction of the topology connection can be provisioned from either port. For example, either of the following CLI commands will configure the opposite direction port for both ports. config interface card shelf/slot/LINEIN oppdirection shelf/slot/ LINEOUT config interface card shelf/slot/LINEOUT oppdirection shelf/slot/ LINEIN ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The opposite direction port parameter for each direction of the topology connection can be deleted from either port. For example, either of the following CLI commands will delete the opposite direction port for both ports. config interface card shelf/slot/LINEIN oppdirection delete config interface card shelf/slot/LINEOUT oppdirection delete E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-58 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Disconnect PC from the Network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect PC from the Network Overview

The CIT provisioning was changed to allow discovery of all the network elements. See Establish connection to the network. Once the commissioning is completed, the NE CIT provisioning must be returned to the original settings. Procedure

The following is the procedure to disconnect the PC from the network: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Telnet to the temporary CIT port address and log in to CLI following the procedure described in “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 4-12). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type config interface ec 1/1/cit red disable and Result: This turns off route redistribution. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type config interface ec 1/1/cit ip and Where is the original IP address of the CIT port before it was changed. Note: Typically this is the default IP address, 172.16.0.1. Sample output is as shown in the following: WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result in a loss of IP connectivity to this network element from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity will not be affected.

Enter yes to confirm, no to cancel. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Type yes and Result: Communication to the NE is lost. Close the telnet session. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Open a Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Type ipconfig /renew and

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-59 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Disconnect PC from the Network

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: This will force the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE through DHCP. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Type ipconfig and Verify the PC has successfully obtained an IP address from the NE, and the Default Gateway is once again the original CIT IP address. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

The PC can now be disconnected from the NE. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Understanding the loss report Background

The loss report is generated in the following circumstances: • • •

When the network commissioning wizard completes, regardless of whether it completes successfully. After adding, removing, or upgrading an NE. After performing a network power balance.

•

On demand by the user.

The loss report is only fully supported for systems comprised of Auto managed lines. The PhM only includes the ingress LD of a FOADM through node and excludes through path of a FOADM through node. Overview

The report is generated as an HTML file. Errors are highlighted in red. Warnings are highlighted in yellow. This section contains the following topics. •

“Report organization” (p. 6-61)

• •

“Report content” (p. 6-62) “Loss value field of loss report” (p. 6-63)

•

“Notes field of loss report” (p. 6-64)

•

“Highlighting in the loss report” (p. 6-65)

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-60 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Report organization

The loss report details the card and span losses and gains along the A-Z and Z-A paths for each NE in the ring. The report is organized as follows: • • •

Summary of errors Losses in the A to Z direction Span loss node n to node 1

• • • •

Node 1 status Node 1 Port to port losses Span loss node 1 to node 2 Node 2 status

• •

Node 2 Port to port losses Losses in the Z to A direction

Figure 6-40 Shows a section of the loss report for a span and a node

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-61 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Report content

A summary is provided for each NE in the ring, indicating the status of the last ingress and egress adjust. The summary is colored red if the NE has an error condition, or yellow if the NE has a warning condition. The Last ingress result and Last egress result fields indicate the cause of the error or warning, if applicable. The possible errors and warnings are detailed in “Troubleshooting failed adjustments” (p. 6-74). The following information is reported for each span in the path. • • • •

The actual loss (or gain) for the span, in dB The minimum allowable loss (or gain) for the span, in dB, from the EPT The maximum allowable loss (or gain) for the span, in dB, from the EPT The loss value (commission or real time)

•

Notes that provide additional information in diagnosing errors and warnings. See “Notes field of loss report” (p. 6-64) for details.

Table 6-1

Report contents

Term

Explanation

NE loss trace “A to Z”

The direction of the commissioning signal.

NE loss trace “Z to A”

The direction of the commissioning signal.

Actual Loss (Gain) (dB)

The Actual loss is the measured loss between two consecutive Wavelength Tracker detect points. In the case of an amplifier, the Actual Gain is the current gain setting of the amplifier. The actual loss must fall between the values specified for the LPT Min and Max losses. If the adjusts for the node are successful then no highlighting is applied to the components in the node and losses outside the range are noted as “Loss accommodated”. If at least one of the adjusts for the node in a given direction has failed recently then highlighting is applied and action by the user is required. See the following for highlighting rules. Note: In the case of a loss report generated after the Greenfield commissioning wizard has run, some lines may not have been completed, either due to upstream failures or because lines were excluded by the wizard. In this case the Actual loss field indicates n/a for the loss measurements because losses have not been calculated yet for those lines of the system.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-62 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-1

Report contents

(continued)

Term

Explanation

LPT Max Loss (Gain) (dB)

The maximum expected card or span loss that is used to plan the network. The maximum span loss is obtained by the sum of the nominal span loss and user-defined patch-panel and fiber loss margin. Maximum card loss is defined by considering the loss of the specific component and appropriate connector losses within and between cards. The component loss is obtained from a statistical analysis of the component loss data. Total losses within an NE are derived by a statistical RMS addition of all the individual cards along through path of the NE.

LPT Nominal Loss (Gain) (dB)

The nominal card or span loss used to plan the network. Total nominal loss within an NE is derived by the linear addition of the nominal card losses.

LPT Min Loss (Gain) (dB)

The minimum expected card or span loss used to plan the network. Loss value indicates how the loss value reported was obtained:

Notes

•

Real time: Wavelength Tracker measurement of the loss

•

Commission: bulk power measurement of the loss

Provides additional information, as described in “Notes field of loss report” (p. 6-64).

Loss value field of loss report

The loss value field indicates how the displayed loss was calculated. Amplifier gains shown in the loss report are read directly from the LD pack, therefore no text is shown in the Loss value field. Table 6-2

Loss value field loss report explanations

Text

Explanation

Real time

Real-time Wavelength Tracker readings were used to calculate the loss when the report was generated.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-63 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-2

Loss value field loss report explanations

(continued)

Text

Explanation

Commission

Commission is displayed when there are no wavelength services with WT readings available when the report is generated. The displayed loss is the loss that was calculated during the last commissioning adjustment. Commissioning adjustments are defined as: 1. Kitless commissioning adjustments used to commission a system. 2. Or, WT-based power adjustments when the line has not been commissioned.

Notes field of loss report

The notes field of a row in the loss report displays additional information to the user. Table 6-3

Notes field terms and definitions

Note

Explanation

Warning: Loss x.x dB too high.

The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss.

Warning: Loss x.x dB too low

The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss.

Error: Loss x.x dB too high

The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss and is associated with a failed power management adjustment.

Note: The level “Warning ” or “Error” is based on whether the loss is just outside the PT range within 1 dB, or whether the loss is outside of the PT range + 1 dB. However, if the adjust succeeds the “Error” is changed to a “Warning ”.

If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be a Warning instead of an error. Error: Loss x.x dB too low

The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss and is associated with a failed power management adjustment. If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be a Warning instead of an error.

Loss Accommodated.

The loss is outside the planned range, but the loss was accommodated by the auto power management adjustment.

Average attenuation of x.x dB applied to range

For a CWR8 thru, WSS thru or ROADM thru path x.x dB was applied to the planned loss range. This equals the applied attenuation of the optical device in the path.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-64 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-3

Notes field terms and definitions

(continued)

Note

Explanation

Power not found

No optical power was found that could be used to calculate a loss.

Error: unable to read loss value

A measured loss could not be calculated and a commissioning loss was not available on the network element.

(Target gain = xx.x dB)

The adjustment function calculated a gain of xx.x dB which did not fall within the planned gain range.

Loss within 10% of max

The measured loss is within 10% of the maximum planned value. Several components within 10% of the max may cause an auto power management adjustment to fail.

Upstream loss too high

The ingress adjustment has failed and the loss preceding the ingress LD is too high.

x dB of y dB repair margin consumed

Indicates that the ingress adjustment has set the gain of the ingress LD within the repair margin allocated for this LD. The gain is approaching the maximum gain planned for this amplifier.

DCM present

Indicates that a dispersion compensation device is between the two detect points used to calculate the loss.

Highlighting in the loss report

If errors or warnings are generated during commissioning or during an in-service power adjustment, the relevant cells within the loss report are highlighted to help identify the source of the problems. Warnings are highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red. Highlighting is conditional on whether the report was generated during commissioning or during an in-service operation, and based on the last adjust results for each NE. In the following table, the rule applies for the combination of ingress line to egress line, that is the egress line is on different degree of the node from the ingress line. Table 6-4

Highlighting loss report rules

Last ingress result

Last egress result

Highlighting

Success

Success

No highlighting applied to the loss report. Losses that are outside LPTMin to LPT Max are noted as “” in the Notes field.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-65 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Understanding the loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-4

Highlighting loss report rules

(continued)

Last ingress result

Last egress result

Highlighting

Power adjust warning span repair margin violated

Success

The ingress amp is highlighted yellow with a Warning message. The preceding span and other ingress components may also be highlighted yellow with a Warning message. Although the ingress adjust has passed, some of the span repair margin has been used. In this case, the network remains in a normal operating state. Although no action is required, the operator may choose to address the warning.

Success

Anything other than success

Warnings: Components or spans highlighted in yellow with a Warning message may indicate a potential problem.

Anything other than success

Success

The measured component or span loss is less than the LPT Min or greater than the LPT Max values, but is within the measurement accuracy window. Before attempting to fix the flagged warnings, check for any components in the Error state.

Anything other than success

Anything other than success

Errors: Components or spans highlighted in red with an Error message require attention. The measured component or span loss is less than the LPT Min or greater than the LPT Max values, including measurement accuracy. Amplifiers highlighted in red with an Error message indicate a problem area since the gain setting required is outside of the allowed range.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-66 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Generate and review system loss report Overview

The System Loss Report of the CPB tool displays the loss per channel through a network element from ingress degree to egress degree. There are two-target applications for this NE loss report. One use is to check the pad values selected during commissioning of the FOADM network elements. The second use is to quickly audit a FOADM node in-service to discover if any excess loss exists within the node if optical power out of range alarms are observed on one or more channels. Prerequisites

Prior to creating a System Loss Report, the user should complete provisioning of the EPT parameters for the target system. If the system has been commissioned, this prerequisite is met. If these parameters are not provisioned, the System Loss Report will not display a target loss range for the loop or express channels and the expected gain range for the LDs will also be missing. The user must run the Provision System using plan wizard to provision the required planning tool parameters prior to creating a System Loss Report. The parameters in Table 6-5, “Minimum EPT parameters for network element” (p. 6-67) are the minimum set of parameters that must be provisioned. Table 6-5

Minimum EPT parameters for network element

EPT Commissioning Parameter

Tag in planning tool commissioning .xml file

Applicable Port

LD Gmin

AmpMinGain

LD Sig Out

LD Gmax

AmpMaxGain

LD Sig Out

Ingress LD target output power

TargetOutputPower

LD Sig Out

Ingress LD power deviation out

DeviationOut

LD Sig Out

Egress target output power

TargetOutputPower

LD Line Out

Egress power deviation out

DeviationOut

LD Line Out

Generating a loss report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If the CPB tool is not already running, start it by selecting Provision -> Launch CPB... from the top menu and login using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM login and password. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select Commissioning -> Create System Loss Report (using plan)... from the top menu.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-67 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

An overview window will appear as shown in Figure 6-41, “CPB Create system loss report overview” (p. 6-68). Click Next>. Figure 6-41 CPB Create system loss report overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

The planning tool file selection window is displayed as shown in Figure 6-42, “CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file” (p. 6-68). Figure 6-42 CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-68 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the target system and select the file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Click Next and the system loss report stages window displays as shown in Figure 6-43, “CPB Create system loss report stages progress window” (p. 6-69). Result: The last page appears as shown in Figure 6-44, “CPB Create system loss

report last page” (p. 6-70). Figure 6-43 CPB Create system loss report stages progress window

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-69 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Wait until the stages show completed and click Next>. Figure 6-44 CPB Create system loss report last page

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-70 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Click View Report, and a loss report will be displayed similar to the one shown in Figure 6-45, “CPB sample loss report” (p. 6-71). Alternatively, click Download Report to save the report to a selected location. Figure 6-45 CPB sample loss report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Click Finish to close the create system loss report wizard. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Loss report content

The egress line selected by the user, and the result of the last power management adjustment (applicable only to Auto managed lines) is displayed above the tables. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-71 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

One table per ingress line selected by the user is displayed next. The fields of the table are explained in Table 6-6, “Loss report fields” (p. 6-72). Table 6-6

Loss report fields

Field

Description

Path - Port from

The starting point for the measured loss.

Path - Port to

The end point for the measured loss. The measured loss is between “Port from” to “Port to”.

Expected Loss Range - PT Min Loss (Gain) dB

The minimum planned loss or gain between “Port from” and “Port to”.

Expected Loss Range - PT Max Loss (Gain) dB

The maximum planned loss or gain between “Port from” and “Port to”.

Notes

Displays additional information. See “The notes field of the loss report” (p. 6-73).

Measured Loss (dB)

The measured loss for each ITU channel provisioned between the ingress line and egress line.

ITU

There are three sections of the table. The first section is the Target Loss Comparison section. In this section, the loss between the target power per channel at the ingress LD Sig Out for the ingress line and the egress line LD Line Out is measured. The valid loss range includes the expected power deviation from the target values. The second section is the WTD detect point to detect point losses section. In this section, each row contains the measured loss between two Wavelength Tracker detect points. The third section is the Per channel status. In this section, below each ITU channel column, the status for each channel is reported. • •

If the loss is measured and in range the status is “OK”. If the loss is measured and is too high the status is “Too high”.

• •

If the loss is measured and is too low the status is “Too low”. If the loss was not measured the status is “n/a”.

The PT Min Loss and PT Max Loss fields show n/a if the planned loss is not set on the network element, or cannot be calculated, for WTD to WTD losses and the target loss range, respectively.n/a indicates“not available”.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-72 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Generate and review system loss report

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The notes field of the loss report

The notes field contains additional information. • •

Power not found - power readings were not available for one or more of the channels. “n/a” is shown where the loss for the channel would normally be displayed. Error: Unable to calculate target loss range - displayed when the planning tool data required to calculate the target loss range is not available. See Table 6-6, “Loss report fields” (p. 6-72) for the required planning tool data.

System report highlighting

If the measured loss reported is outside the planned range by less than or equal to 1 dB the loss is highlighted yellow. If the measured loss is outside the planned range by more than 1 dB the loss is highlighted red. If the measured loss is within the planned range the loss is not highlighted. The WTD to WTD losses are not highlighted if the measured loss in the Target Loss Comparison is not highlighted. If a measured loss cannot be calculated no highlighting is applied to the measured loss. If the planned or target loss range is not available no highlighting is applied. Troubleshooting using the loss report

Losses that are highlighted Yellow indicate a potential problem. Losses that are highlighted Red indicate a problem that should be corrected. For a path from an ingress line that is Manually power managed to an egress line that is Manually power managed on a FOADM node, the most likely problem is an incorrect pad selection for the optical connection between the drop side and add side of the path. As removal of an attenuating pad will break the optical path of the signal, attenuating pad changes should be done during a maintenance time window. During service turn-up, the loss report can be used as an aide to ensure that the selected pad for the new service is correct. After adding the attenuating pad for the new service, run the loss report to compare the measured loss for the channel to the target loss range.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-73 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshooting failed adjustments Overview

After the Commission Greenfield System wizard completes, a loss report is generated. Refer to “Understanding the loss report” (p. 6-60) for more details about the loss report. See Figure 6-45, “CPB sample loss report” (p. 6-71). Above each node loss summary in the loss report, there is a box with Last ingress result = and Last egress result = (see Figure 6-45, “CPB sample loss report” (p. 6-71). If there is a failure on the NE, then the box is highlighted. Warnings are highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red. This section provides a list of the possible messages, along with a detailed description of the message and any corrective action required. Table 6-7, “Loss report error messages” (p. 6-74) provides a list of possible error messages. Follow the applicable corrective action to troubleshoot the error. Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Aborted

The power adjustment was aborted by the user.

NA

This message applies to in-service adjustments only. Action not supported for that location

The point selected is not a power adjustment target point.

See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/ PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide for a list of valid adjustment points.

Amplifier is gain limited (ingress adjustment)

The amplifier output power is at its maximum allowable level and the gain has been clamped.

Go to “Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-80).

Amplifier is gain limited (egress adjustment)

The amplifier output power is at its maximum allowable level and the gain has been clamped.

Go to “Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (egress adjustment)” (p. 6-80).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-74 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Amplifier signal power unavailable

The adjustment failed because the NE was unable to retrieve the signal power from the corresponding ingress/egress amplifier. This message applies to Commission Greenfield System wizard triggered adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot amplifier signal power unavailable” (p. 6-81)).

No through services provisioned

An adjustment cannot be completed for the through path of the network element because no services are provisioned or present. This message is not considered a failure. This message pertains to in-service egress power adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot no through services provisioned” (p. 6-81).

Pack required for adjust not present

A pack required to perform a power adjustment is not present.

Go to “Troubleshoot pack required for adjust not present” (p. 6-81).

Communication time-out with upstream node

Communication with the upstream node failed.

Go to “Troubleshoot communication time-out with upstream node” (p. 6-82).

Configuration request unsuccessful

The software encountered an internal error.

Go to “Troubleshoot configuration request unsuccessful” (p. 6-82).

Error

A general error has occurred.

Check for alarms and troubleshoot.

Fiber is not yet commissioned

The commissioning flag for the line where the adjustment was triggered has not been set to completed yet. This message applies to in-service adjustments only, triggered directly by the user.

Go to “Troubleshoot fiber is not yet commissioned” (p. 6-83).

Local adjustment is still in progress

A power adjustment is currently in progress. This message applies to in-service adjustments only.

Wait for the adjustment to complete.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-75 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Power adjust failed - span repair margin violated

The power adjustment failed because the required gain falls within the area designated for the span splice margin.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-83).

Power adjust warning - splice margin violated

Indicates that the ingress amplifier gain encroaches on the span repair margin.

Go to “Troubleshoot power adjust warning - splice margin violated” (p. 6-83).

Loss too high (ingress adjustment)

The loss from the output of the previous node to the ingress amp on the current node is greater than the maximum allowable span loss specified in the EPT commissioning file. The loss cannot be accommodated by the gain limits for the ingress amplifier planned by the EPT.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-83).

In-service: The required gain calculated by the adjustment exceeds the planned maximum gain plus a margin over the maximum gain. Triggered by Commission Greenfield System wizard: The required gain calculated by the adjustment exceeds the planned maximum gain. Loss too high (egress adjustment). The loss within the node is too high.

The loss within the node is too high.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too high (egress adjustment)” (p. 6-84).

Loss too low (ingress adjustment)

The loss from the output of the previous node to the ingress amp on the current node is less than the minimum allowable span loss specified in the EPT commissioning file. The loss cannot be accommodated by the gain limits of the ingress amplifier.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too low (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-85).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-76 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Loss too low (egress adjustment)

The loss within the node is too low.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too low (egress adjustment)” (p. 6-85).

Maximum number of iterations reached

Maximum number of adjustment iterations is reached. The probable cause is erratic power transient. This message may appear for an egress adjustment triggered at a terminal line if the OT or SVAC power setpoint cannot be achieved. This message applies to in-service power adjustments only. This can also occur if the OT line port admin state is down.

Go to “Troubleshoot Maximum number of iterations reached” (p. 6-86).

No services in appropriate state for adjustment

The services required to perform an in-service power adjustment are in a power unstable state or the Wavelength Tracker detect point reporting powers has been declared unreliable and the power adjustment cannot proceed. This message applies to in-service power adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot no services in appropriate state for adjustment” (p. 6-86).

No through services in appropriate state for adjustment

The services required to perform an in-service power adjustment are in a power unstable state or the Wavelength Tracker detect point reporting powers has been declared unreliable and the power adjustment cannot proceed. This message applies to in-service egress power adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot no through services in appropriate state for adjustment” (p. 6-87).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-77 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

No services present

Impossible to complete adjustment without services provisioned. This message applies to in service power adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot no services present” (p. 6-87).

Power changing; cannot adjust

The total or signal power readings are not stable and the power adjustment cannot execute. This message applies to adjustments triggered by the Commission Greenfield System wizard only.

Contact your next level of support.

Power measurement is unavailable

The power management application failed to retrieve a value from one of the line packs.

Go to “Troubleshoot power measurement is unavailable” (p. 6-87).

Success

Adjustment completed successfully. Loss compensated within tolerance.

NA

Timeout caused adjust to halt

The power adjustment timed out.

Go to “Troubleshoot time-out caused adjust to halt” (p. 6-88).

Topology provisioning is incomplete

The NE fiber topology is not fully defined.

Go to “Troubleshoot topology provisioning is incomplete” (p. 6-88).

Upstream data unavailable

Data from the upstream NEs is unavailable.

Go to “Troubleshoot communication time-out with upstream node” (p. 6-82).

Upstream software incompatible

The NE upstream of the node where the ingress adjustment was attempted is running an incompatible software release.

Go to “Troubleshoot upstream software incompatible” (p. 6-88).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-78 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Ingress amplifier gain exceeds maximum planned gain

The adjustment set the gain of the ingress LD above the maximum planned gain, but less than the maximum planned gain plus margin. This is not a failure, however too many amplifiers in this state will cause the OSNR of services to be too low to maintain error free transmission. The network operator should try to clear this state as soon as possible. This message applies to in service ingress adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-83).

Egress amplifier gain exceeds maximum planned gain

The adjustment set the gain of the egress LD above the maximum planned gain, but less than the maximum planned gain plus margin. This is not a failure, however too many amplifiers in this state will cause the OSNR of services to be too low to maintain error free transmission. The network operator should try to clear this state as soon as possible. This message applies to in service egress adjustments only.

Go to “Troubleshoot loss too high (egress adjustment)” (p. 6-84).

Amplifier mid-stage loss problem

The adjustment cannot be completed because the loss of the amplifier mid-stage is out of range.

Go to “Troubleshoot amplifier mid-stage loss problem” (p. 6-89).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-79 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 6-7

Loss report error messages

(continued)

Message

Description

Corrective Action

Some add path control points incomplete

The in-service egress adjustment was unable to completely adjust some of the locally added channels for the line at which the adjustment was run.

Go to “Troubleshoot add path control points incomplete” (p. 6-89).

Adjustment using ASE not possible - cross connect provisioned

There is a cross-connect provisioned on the line on which the adjustment was attempted. The power adjustment cannot be completed with this cross-connect present.

Go to “Troubleshoot adjustment not possible cross-connect provisioned” (p. 6-90).

Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (ingress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the input power to the amplifier. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If it is abnormally high, this indicates a problem upstream. Correct the upstream problem. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (egress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If the problem is not traffic affecting, no action is required. This procedure is complete. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check loss between the output of the amplifier and node output. Clean or replace components as necessary. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Check for incorrect fibering that may have caused the input power to the amplifier to be too high. Clean or replace components as necessary. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-80 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshoot amplifier signal power unavailable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Perform a warm reset of the amplifier pack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If the fault persists, perform a cold reset of the amplifier pack by reseating the pack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If the fault persists, replace the amplifier pack. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Rerun the commissioning wizard. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot no through services provisioned ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Provision at least one present wavelength on through path. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Retry adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot pack required for adjust not present ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are present. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are Admin up. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Check for any alarms related to the packs. Replace packs if necessary. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-81 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshoot communication time-out with upstream node ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If the fault persists, check that the OSC CN link between the nodes of the segment is up. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Troubleshoot the CN link if necessary. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot configuration request unsuccessful ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check for alarms and troubleshoot following the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check for packs that reset during the adjustment. Try rerunning the adjustment if a pack had reset during the adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-82 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshoot fiber is not yet commissioned ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If commissioning of the system has not been done yet, follow the commissioning procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If commissioning of the system has been completed, set the commissioning flags of the ingress LD Line ports to completed/true. This can be done by the user through the PhM inventory view, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot power adjust warning - splice margin violated ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, no action is required. This is not considered a failure, but it is a warning to the user that the amplifier gain is approaching the maximum gain planned for the amplifier by the EPT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the message is generated during commissioning, troubleshoot the problem as described in “Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)” (p. 6-83). E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the source of the excess loss using the loss report (see “Understanding the loss report” (p. 6-60)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the span loss is too high, perform the following substeps and retry the adjustment after each step. If not, go to Step 8 . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and the LD Line In port.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-83 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Perform an in-service adjustment from the PhM light path trace power management interface. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If the Loss too high error remains, check the loss on the affected segment and if the span loss is too high field personnel will need to try to correct the span loss. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

If the Loss too high error remains, clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and the LD Line Out port of the upstream network element. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

If the span loss cannot be reduced to meet the planned limit, then a replan of the system will be required using the EPT. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot loss too high (egress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the location on the NE of the excess loss using the loss report (see “Understanding the loss report” (p. 6-60)). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If loss is still too high, replace the pack (or packs) where the measured loss reported by the loss report is closest to the maximum loss. Retry the adjustment, and repeat if necessary. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-84 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot loss too low (ingress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify the span loss using the loss report. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The error may be caused by a fibering error on the ingress path of the NE. Check the actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If the fibering is incorrect on the NE, clean and refiber the NE as required. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If span loss remains too low, check the loss on the affected segment. If it cannot be corrected, a replan of the network using the EPT will be required. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard with the new EPT commissioning file. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, generate a new EPT commissioning file and use it to rebalance the power using the PhM Power Balance (Using Plan) function. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot loss too low (egress adjustment) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the location on the NE where the loss is too low using the loss report (see “Understanding the loss report” (p. 6-60)).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-85 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check the actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering. If the fibering is incorrect on the NE, clean and refiber the NE as required. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot Maximum number of iterations reached ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the admin status of the transponder ports used for commissioning and verify that they are up. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Observe wavelength tracker powers at the input of the ingress amplifier. Retry adjustment if power is stable over a minute. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

For a terminal node configuration (a line that is not connected to other lines within the same NE), check the power setpoint versus the maximum attainable for any add path power control points. To check the OT or SVAC maximum attainable power and current target power, use the PhM inventory view, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot no services in appropriate state for adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Wait for 30 secs to allow any unstable services to stabilize and reattempt the power adjustment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-86 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

For an ingress adjustment, verify that the WT power readings for all channels received at the local line are also present and power in range at the upstream egress line. If any channel powers are missing or power out of range at the upstream egress line, troubleshoot the upstream line. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot no through services in appropriate state for adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Wait for 30 secs to allow any unstable services to stabilize and reattempt the power adjustment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Ensure that Wavelength Tracker powers are visible at the detect points through the node from ingress line(s) to the egress line the egress adjustment was triggered for. Use the PhM light path trace, CLI, or WebUI to confirm the provisioned services are present. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot no services present ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Provision a service (must be completed). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Retry the power adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot power measurement is unavailable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check for any pack missing alarms, as this failure will occur if a pack is not present. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Reinsert the packs that are missing.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-87 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Rerun the commissioning wizard if the adjustment was triggered by the Commission Greenfield System wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Retry the power adjustment at the failed adjustment point using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI interface. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot time-out caused adjust to halt ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check that the NE is online and stable. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check that all packs are up and running (packs are not undergoing reset). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Retry the power adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot topology provisioning is incomplete ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Complete the fiber topology provisioning on the NE. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot upstream software incompatible ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Check the software version on the upstream node. Verify that it is the same version as the other nodes in the system.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-88 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If necessary, perform a software upgrade on the upstream node. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot amplifier mid-stage loss problem ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

If the ingress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the ingress LD. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

If the egress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the egress LD. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

After correcting the mid-stage loss problem retry the adjustment. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the Commission Greenfield System wizard, rerun the commissioning wizard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the user manually, perform a power adjustment using the PhM light path trace power management interface, CLI, or WebUI. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

Troubleshoot add path control points incomplete ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Locate the line where the failure occurred using the loss report. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Check to see if there are any alarms on the network element that affect channels that are added at this line. If there are any such alarms, troubleshoot them and then reattempt the egress adjustment. End procedure. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If there are no alarms, check that the administrative state of all line side ports of active add cross-connects are set to Admin Up. If necessary, correct the setting of any Down ports to Up. Reattempt the egress adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-89 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

System Turn-up and commissioning

Troubleshooting failed adjustments

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Troubleshoot adjustment not possible - cross-connect provisioned ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Identify the line supporting the cross-connect using the loss report. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Delete the cross-connect. Important! Deleting a cross-connect is service affecting. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If using the PhM Commission Greenfield System wizard, reattempt the adjustment through another complete execution of the wizard. If using the WebUI, reattempt the adjustment. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 6-90 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

7

7erformance verification P testing and data retrieval

Overview Purpose

The procedures in this chapter helps you perform final verification on the network after commissioning is complete. Contents Perform database backups

7-1

Perform database backups Purpose

Database backups are performed using TFTP server, which is provided with the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager. This procedure helps you perform database backups on all the NEs in the network. The steps are completed using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for more information. The procedure assumes the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM server is already connected to the network, and all the NEs have been discovered. Commissioning must be complete. Procedure

The following is the procedure to perform database backups.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Perform database backups

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select Admin-> Settings from the top menu in the Topology View window. See Figure 7-1, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu” (p. 7-2). Figure 7-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Perform database backups

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

In the Settings window, select System Settings from the top tab and FTP subtab as shown in Figure 7-2, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window” (p. 7-3). Figure 7-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Verify that the root directory is /tftp files in the TFTP Root Directory dialogue box and select FTP option in Preferred protocal for NE Backup, NE Software Upgrade, and PM: field. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select the Remove Prefix option button. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Click OK.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Perform database backups

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Select the NE you want to back up in the Topology View window. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Select Maintenance -> NE Database Backup & Restore from the top menu bar as shown in Figure 7-3, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu” (p. 7-4). Figure 7-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Click OK and theNE backup & Restore window opens as shown in Figure 7-4, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup” (p. 7-4). Figure 7-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Perform database backups

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

Right-click on the NE and select Details... from the menu as shown in Figure 7-5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu” (p. 7-5). Figure 7-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10

In the Backup Properties window, check both Use the EMS Server as Backup host recommended and Use default backup directory recommended. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Click OK. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12

Ensure that the NE is selected in the list and click the Backup selected NE(s) icon as shown in the following figure. Figure 7-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13

The backup progress is displayed in the bottom half of the Backup & Restore window. Wait for the Backup Success message. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

Verify the database backup file is present in the PhM server PC. The path is C:/tftpfiles/nebackup/ .

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Perform database backups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Where has the format ___.bak ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15

Are there additional NEs that have not been backed up? If yes, go back to Step 6 . If no, this procedure is complete. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 7-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Appendix A: Fiber cleaning

Overview Purpose

This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for the cleaning and inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment. It is critical that the connector endfaces, optical ports, and bulkheads are clean and free from particular contamination to assure proper performance and reliability of lightwave systems. With the modern high speed, high power, and wider bandwidth optical transmission systems, clean connectors along the optical path are absolutely essential for successful operation. Before making any optical connections, perform the “Inspect, Clean, Inspect, Connect” (ICIC) process on every jumper connector endface, optical port, and optical bulkhead. Note: The information in this appendix is applicable to all Alcatel-Lucent optical products, not just Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). There may be tools and connector types listed that are not applicable to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16.

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety instructions

DANGER Laser hazard Never view an energized optical cable with the naked eye or with an optical magnifying instrument. Disconnected or separated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation and direct exposure can severely injure the eye. If inspecting the endface of a connector with a fiberscope, be absolutely certain that the system is deactivated.

DANGER Noxious-substance hazard Alcohol is flammable and is harmful if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin. Keep alcohol away from heat, sparks, or flame. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Contents Cleaning optical connectors

A-3

Inspecting optical connectors

A-6

Cleaning other optical components

A-7

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cleaning optical connectors Materials and tools

For proper cleaning, the equipment and materials in the following table are recommended: Table A-1

Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors

Product

Model

Comcode

ITE #

Installation Order #

Optical Fiber Scope

Noyes OFS 300-200X

408463636

ITE-7129

33712900

2.5 mm Universal adapter Cap

For use with the Noyes OFS 300-200X

408197044

ITE-7129D1

33712901

1.25 mm Universal Adapter Cap

For use with the Noyes OFS 300-200X

408197069

ITE-7129D2

33712902

Video Fiber Scope*

Noyes VFS-

408356830

ITE-7146

4171600

1.25 mm Adapter

For VFS-1

408356848

ITE-7146D1

33714601

2.5 mm Adapter

For VFS-1

408356855

ITE-7146D2

33714602

FC Adapter

For VFS-1

408356863

ITE-7146D3

33714603

LC Adapter

For VFS-1

408356889

ITE-7146D4

33714604

SC Adapter

For VFS-1

408356954

ITE-7146D5

33714605

ST Adapter

For VFS-1

408356962

ITE-7146D6

33714606

Individual Pre-Saturated Alcohol Wipes

99% Pure Isopropyl Alcohol

901375147

ITE-7136

33713600

CLETOP Cleaning Cassette

Type A Reel

901375154

ITE-7137

33713700

CLETOP Cleaning Cassette Replacement Reel

Type A Reel

901375014

ITE-7137 D1

33713701

Luminex Stick Port Cleaners

1.25 mm

901375030

ITE-7134

33713400

Luminex Stick Port Cleaners

2.5 mm

901375022

ITE-7135

33713500

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table A-1

Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors

(continued)

Product

Model

Comcode

ITE #

Installation Order #

Luminex Cloth

5.5” x 5.5”

408201226

R6033

23603300

Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent. Fiber cleaning considerations

Observe the following precautions when handling fibers to prevent contaminates from adhering to the fibers and creating potential errors and unnecessary losses: • • • •

Assume that all fibers are dirty and must be inspected and cleaned before connection to equipment. Always inspect fibers for contaminants and clean where required. Do not remove the protective end caps on fibers or fiber ports until ready to connect. If it is suspected that a fiber or port was contaminated during test or turn up procedures, reinspect and clean as necessary.

Cleaning process

The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector end-face. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe. Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular to the alcohol wipe. Drag it against the wipe three times in a figure 8 pattern. This action applies the alcohol solvent to the end-face and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid contaminates. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7. Otherwise, hold the CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing up.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The lever advances the “dry” Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning the connector. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Insert and press the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in the first of two slots of the cleaner. Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the lever of the cassette. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping procedure using the second slot. Be sure that the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6

Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position. Continue with Step 8. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing, cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule. Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule end-face and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning cloth is not available, a lint-free clean room optic wipe can be used. The Luminex cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times. The optic wipes are single use and disposable. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8

Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Inspecting optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Inspecting optical connectors Connector inspection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the ferrule end-face of the fiber under inspection. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

The visual area of the ferrule end-face (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection system/scope should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the fiber end-face does not meet the following requirements: Requirement:

No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after three wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass fiber end-face. Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron (µ) diameter for both single mode and multi-mode fibers. Requirement:

No chips, cracks, or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber end-face. Requirement:

No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule end-face. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it is immediately inserted into the adapter buildout of the optical component. This assures maximum cleanliness and effectiveness of the connector. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

If the cleaned connector cannot be “connectorized” with a corresponding adapter, the connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on the ferrule, ensure that the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 mm or 1.25 mm) and rotate the stick 360 degrees three times. Following this procedure, carefully place the cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be reinspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization. E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning other optical components

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cleaning other optical components Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors

During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it is necessary to clean the optical buildout adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1

Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors, 1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner is in contact with the connector. Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three times. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3

Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat Step 1. This procedure cleans the side walls of the adapter and the end-face of the circuit pack connector. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into view. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5

Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process in Steps 1 - 3 if the fiber does not meet the requirements specified in “Inspecting optical connectors” (p. A-6) E................................................................................................................................................................................................... N D O F S T E P S

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning other optical components

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 A-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Appendix B: Tightening torque

Overview Purpose

The listed tightening torque values are to be used for all fasteners on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is ±10%. Contents Nominal tightening torques

B-1

Nominal tightening torques Description

The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is ±10%. Table B-1

Nominal tightening torques

Screw Size

Captive screw

General screw

Self-forming screw

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

M2

0.13

1.15

0.26

2.30

0.30

2.66

M2.5

0.28

2.48

0.53

4.63

0.60

5.26

M3

0.48

4.25

0.92

8.15

1.10

9.74

M4

1.10

9.74

2.10

18.60

2.50

22.14

M5

2.15

19.04

4.00

35.43

4.90

43.40

M6

3.80

33.65

6.90

61.11

10.80

95.65

M8

9.30

82.36

17.60

155.87

25.50

225.84

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 B-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Tightening torque

Nominal tightening torques

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table B-1

Nominal tightening torques

(continued)

Screw Size

Captive screw

General screw

Self-forming screw

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

M10

18.50

163.85

30.50

270.13

48.00

425.12

M12

31.40

278.10

59.80

529.63

84.00

743.96

12-24

NA

NA

NA

NA

3.75

34

Table B-2

Nominal tightening torques when using washers

Screw Size

Captive screw

General screw

Self-forming screw

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

N-m

in-lb

M2

0.14

1.24

0.28

2.48

0.32

2.83

M2.5

0.29

2.57

0.58

5.14

0.68

6.02

M3

0.55

4.87

1.00

8.85

1.20

10.63

M4

1.20

10.63

2.30

20.37

2.80

24.80

M5

2.40

21.25

4.50

39.85

5.40

47.82

M6

4.20

37.20

7.60

67.31

11.90

105.40

M8

10.20

90.34

19.40

171.82

28.00

247.99

M10

20.30

179.80

33.55

297.14

52.80

467.63

M12

34.50

305.55

65.80

582.77

92.70

821.01

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 B-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A

access identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that are defined for the system architecture. add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example, DS3 or DS1). ADM

See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition. AHPHG

High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term. AID

See “access identifier” (p. GL-1) for definition. AIM

See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition. AINS

Automatic in-service. AIS

See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition. alarm

External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an external system interface or through audible or visible indicators. alarm indication message (AIM)

A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm. alarm indication signal (AIS)

A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed. alarm list

A status report that lists active alarms on the NE. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

alarm log

A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE. alarm severity

An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are processed depends on their severity. ALPHG

Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG” (p. GL-1) for related term. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages, communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International Organization for Standards (ISO). amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input power. ANSI

See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition. APD

See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition. APS

See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition. APSD

See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition. ASE

See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition. asynchronous

Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal. asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video, image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS). ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic. ATM

See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

attenuation

The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering. Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km. attenuator

A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform. automatic power shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. automatic protection switching (APS)

A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route when a failure is detected on a working route. autonomous message

Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and changes in the system database. avalanche photodiode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B

back reflection

See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-12). background block errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring. backward defect indication (BDI)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure. band optical filter (BOF)

A band-dependent optical card. bay

An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack. BB

See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition. BBA

See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-3 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

BBE

See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition. BDI

See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition. BER

See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition. bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection. bit error rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent. BLSR

See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition. BOF

See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition. broadband (BB)

A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at lightning-fast speeds. broadband amplifier (BBA)

Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C

CAD

See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition. central office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long distance subscribers. CFR

Code of Federal Regulations.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-4 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

channel

A communications path or the signal sent over that path. channel add/drop card (CAD)

Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line. channel optical filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints. chromatic dispersion

The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality. CIDR

See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition. CIT

See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition. cladding

Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the core. classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)

Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions. CLEI

See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-6) for definition. CN

See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition. CO

See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition. coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing (WDM).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-5 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

COF

See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition. common language element identifier (CLEI)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and are 10 bytes long. connector

A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a fiber and a source or detector. connector variation

The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors (for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation. control network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example, communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol. core

The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index of refraction than the cladding. coupler

An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers. coupling ratio/loss (CR)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a percentage. CPE

See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition. CR

See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition. craft interface terminal (CIT)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or, by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system. customer premises equipment (CPE)

Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point. CWDM

See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-6 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D

data communication network (DCN)

DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management system (NMS). DCM

See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition. DCN

See “data communication network” (p. GL-7) for definition. dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example, minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber. DGEF

See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition. DHCP

See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition. dispersion

The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects. dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and post-amplification. distortion

The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received). DS3

Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989). DWDM

See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition. dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal. dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-7 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E

earth

The European term for electrical ground. EC

See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition. EDFA

See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition. edge node

A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network. egress

Traffic leaving a network EIA

See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition. electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)

Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker. electromagnetic capability (EMC)

EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic environment electromagnetic interference (EMI)

EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449. electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans. Element Management System (EMS)

The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network, including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement (SLA) management. EMC

See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-8 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EMI

See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition. EMS

See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition. EN

European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.” Engineering rules

A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate, and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that can be supported. equipment controller (EC)

EC is the equipment controller card˙, in a chassis with replaceable controllers, or it is the integrated control hardware in a PSS-1. erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the 1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm, and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber. ESD

See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition. Ethernet LAN

A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet broadcast to all devices on the LAN. ETSI

See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition. European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European community. eVOA

See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-9 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F

failure

Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time. failure in time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion operating hours. failure rate

The number of failures of a device per unit of time. FC

See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition. FC

See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition. FCS

See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-12) for definition. FDA

See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition. FDDI

See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition. FDI

See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition. FEC

See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable. Ferrule

A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly. fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps. fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers. fiber optic connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-10 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

back reflection. field-programmable gate array (FPGA)

General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production. file transfer protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using the Internet. FIT

See “failure in time” (p. GL-10) for definition. FIT rate

The number of device failures in one billion device hours. flash disk memory module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database. flow

Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow). FMM

See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition. FOADM

Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing. Food and Drug Administration (FDA)

An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary products, and cosmetics. forward defect indicator (FDI)

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP label. forward error correction (FEC)

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data. The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network transit.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-11 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FPGA

See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-11) for definition. frame check sequence (FCS)

Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and other data link layer protocols. Fresnel reflection

A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term. FTP

See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-11) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G

gain

The increase in power and magnitude of a signal. gateway network element (GNE)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources. GbE

See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition. Gbps

Giga bits per second generic framing protocol (GFP)

Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR) stream. GFP

See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition. Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many enterprise networks. glass through-connection

A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-12 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GMPLS

Generalized Multi-Protocol Label-Switching GMRE

GMPLS Routing Engine GNE

See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition. graphical user interface (GUI)

A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the program easier to use. grooming

Consolidating or segregating traffic. grooming node

A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate signal for more efficient transport. ground

The North American term for electrical earth. GUI

See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-13) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I

ILA

See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition. in-line amplifier (ILA)

A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-24) for related term. ingress

Traffic entering a network. insertion loss

The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a previously continuous path. International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of industrial and technical fields. International Telecommunications Union (ITU)

An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a worldwide basis. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-13 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Internet protocol (IP)

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks. Internet protocol security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks. Internet service provider (ISP)

A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting. IP

See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition. IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)

See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-14) for definition. ISO

See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition. ISP

See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-14) for definition. ITU

See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J

jacket

The outer, protective covering of the cable. jitter

Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits. jumper

A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L

lambda (λ)

The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-14 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

laser bias current (LBC)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced. LBC

See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition. LBO

See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition. LC

See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-16) for definition. LD

See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition. LGX

A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element (NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on the NE itself. line build out (LBO)

Attenuation used to simulate a load. line driver (LD)

An amplifier used to improve the strength of a signal at its source by driving the input of the transmission line with an amplified signal. link state advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status. LOF

See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition. long reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration. LOS

See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition. loss

The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber defects. loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time. loss of service/loss of signal (LOS) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-15 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold. LR

See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition. LSA

See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition. Lucent connector (LC)

Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule. This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single mode). ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M

MAC

See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition. management information base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format. margin

The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design. master controller (MC)

The system's master controller (MC) card. Mbps

Mega bits per second MC

See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition. MD4H

A PSS-1 Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature Hardened. mean time between failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours. mean time to repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours. media access control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-16 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

mesh

A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and two for the west. MIB

See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition. mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)

An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external dispersion compensation unit. modulation

A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal). Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded modulation (PCM). MSA

See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-17) for definition. MTBF

See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition. MTTR

See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition. multimode fiber

An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers. multiplexer (MUX)

A device that combines two or more signals into a single output. multiplexing

The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing. MUX

See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition. muxponder

A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N

NE

See “network element” (p. GL-18) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-17 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NEBS

See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition. network element (NE)

Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching and transport network functions and contains network operations functions. For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity, and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and ADM (add/drop multiplexer). Network Element Management System (NMS)

The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network, including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement (SLA) management. Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs). network services

Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service. network time protocol (NTP)

Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment. NMS

See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-18) for definition. node

A node (or network element) is a set of one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the following: •

up to two single optical shelves

•

a single electrical shelf

•

a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves

non-service affecting (NSA)

Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service. NSA

See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition. NTP

See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-18 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O

OA

See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-20) for definition. OAMP

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning. OC-n

See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-20) for definition. Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)

OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health legislation. OCHAN or OCh

See “optical channel” (p. GL-20) for definition. ODU

See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition. ODU-k

An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G. OEO

See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-21) for definition. OOF

See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition. Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant system. Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on mainframes or minicomputers. OPR

See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition. OPS

See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition. optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-19 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used. optical amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form. optical carrier level-n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric. optical cell

A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned within the context of one cell. optical channel (OCHAN, Och)

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications. optical demultiplexer (ODU)

Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer. optical path protection (OPP)

A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path, there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic. optical path restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms). optical power meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable. optical protection switch (OPS)

An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection. optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise signal. optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic. The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and orderwire communication. optical transponder (OT)

An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion. OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming, .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-20 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring (non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal. optical transport network (OTN)

A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network. See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for examples. optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)

The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical data. orderwire

A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites. OSC

See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition. OSHA

See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-19) for definition. OSI

See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition. OSNR

See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition. OSP

See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition. OSS

See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition. OT

See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition. OTN

See “optical transport network” (p. GL-21) for definition. out of frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for several consecutive frames. outside plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-21 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P

PCS

See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition. PDL

See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition. PDU

See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-23) for definition. performance monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems (before an alarm would be generated). photonic cross-connect (PXC)

A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one or more wavelengths on each fiber or port. photonic protection switch (PPS)

By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are automatically created. physical coding sublayer (PCS)

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports. PM

See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-22) for definition. PMD

See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition. point-to-point transmission

The transmission between two designated stations. polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave). polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the received optical signal.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-22 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PPS

See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-22) for definition. protocol data unit (PDU)

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers. provisioning

Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a customer record in a database to activate the services. PXC

See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-22) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q

QoS

See “quality of service” (p. GL-23) for definition. quality of service (QoS)

A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual connection. QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R

rack

A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called bay frames. random jitter (RJ)

Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an associated probability. receiver

A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an optical-to-electrical converter. receiver sensitivity

The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate (BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or OSNR degradation). reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-23 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate resources to a new demand matrix). regeneration

Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is implied in this context. remote network monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819. repeater

A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term. request for comment (RFC)

A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies. restoration domain

A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the network. RFC

See “request for comment” (p. GL-24) for definition. RIP

See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition. RJ

See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition. RMON

See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-24) for definition. ROADM

See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition. routing information protocol (RIP)

RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453) that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S

SA

See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-24 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SAN

See “storage area network” (p. GL-28) for definition. SC

See “shelf controller” (p. GL-26) for definition. scattering

The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting material. SCOT

See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-27) for definition. SDH

See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition. secure shell (SSH)

An encrypted method of transmitting data. segment

A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites. SELV

Safety extra low voltage. service affecting (SA)

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service. Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide. services

Within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure. SFC

See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition. SFD

See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-28) for definition. SFP

See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition. shared risk group (SRG)

A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-25 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

shelf

A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in Bays. An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management system. Connections between nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term. shelf controller (SC)

The SC card in a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf. signaling transfer point (STP)

A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 nodes and the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 control network. simplex

A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector). single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal. site

The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more glass-through connections. SLA

See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition. small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher. The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts. SMF

See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-26 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SNCP

See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition. SNMP

See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-26) for definition. software control of transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps, DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs. software generic (SW generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release. SONET

See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition. SONET wavelength service

The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network. span

A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections. span loss

Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice losses). splice

A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means. SRG

See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition. SSH

See “secure shell” (p. GL-25) for definition. SSMF

See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition. ST

See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-28) for definition. standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km). .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-27 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

static filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack. static filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack. storage area network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users. STP

See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-26) for definition. straight-tip connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling. STS, STS-n

See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition. Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR. SW generic

See “software generic” (p. GL-27) for definition. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mbps to 40 Gbps that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world. SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment. Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical long-distance networks. SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 Mbps, called OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on an optical fiber. synchronous signal

A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal. synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mbps for an STS-1 signal and a rate of n times 51.840 Mbps for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-28 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T

tap

The entry point into a system module. target identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command. TCA

See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition. TCP

See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition. TCP/IP

A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP. TDM

See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition. Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network. thermal noise

Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance current. threshold crossing alert (TCA)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT. TID

See “target identifier” (p. GL-29) for definition. time-division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to send several bit streams of information. TL1 (Transaction language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1 messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia. TMN

See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-29 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TOADM

See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition. topology

The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network topology database contains information regarding each link in the network. traffic grooming

Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. traps (SNMP)

SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS. tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U

UDP

See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-31) for definition. UL

See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components, assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety. unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction (for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-30 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR: •

is path-specific as opposed to line specific

•

does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)

•

requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network element can make all its decisions without involving the source)

UPSR

See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition. user datagram protocol (UDP)

A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams. user services

Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service. UTC

Coordinated universal time. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V

variable optical attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the receiving equipment. VCAT

See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition. very short reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300 meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems. virtual concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation do not. virtual time-slot (VTS)

1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-31 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VOA

See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition. VSR

See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition. VTS

See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W

wave division multiplexing (WDM)

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM). wave key

A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual wavelengths through the network. A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys. waveguide

A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave. waveguide coupler

A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides. wavelength

The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave, typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and the frequency. (Also called lambda.) wavelength growth

A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are added. Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network, and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths. WaveWrapper

WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-32 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WDM

See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-32) for definition. WDM demand

The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network. WDM line

A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs). Web user interface (WebUI)

A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE). WebUI

See “Web user interface” (p. GL-33) for definition. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X

XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)

A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel, and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Y

Y-coupler

A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a “Y” shape which connects an input port to two output ports or two-input ports to a single output port. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z

ZIC (zero-installation craft)

An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-33 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Glossary ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 GL-34 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Index

A about this document, xix

.............................................................

.............................................................

L loopback IP address, 4-24

B Before you begin, 2-2

.............................................................

.............................................................

N NE date and time, 4-38

C Cleaning optical connectors, A-3

.............................................................

Cleaning other optical components, A-7

R rack installation, 2-7 .............................................................

CLI access, 4-12 configure GNE for management system access, 4-31 configure system properties, 4-55

S SDH mode, 4-23

Shelf cover installation, 2-105 software environment, 4-14

.............................................................

.............................................................

E example configuration of ftp

U update firmware, 4-49

server, 4-57 ............................................................. F Fiber cleaning, A-3 ............................................................. G Glossary, GL-1 ............................................................. I

ID module replacement, 2-46 initialize database, 4-7 Inspecting optical connectors, A-6 Installation and Provisioning of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, 2-26 Installation and Replacement, 2-18 installation and seat packs, 2-45

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 IN-1 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013

Index ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 IN-2 3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0 Issue 1 June 2013